1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Start New Environment
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and behind it the new list.
10543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Start New Parent Environment
10546 only appears if the item is nested.
10547 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12699 es; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12859 \begin_inset space ~
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 European Computer Modern
12881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12888 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12891 \begin_layout Standard
12900 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12901 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12914 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12920 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12921 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12924 \begin_layout Itemize
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12933 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12946 \begin_inset space ~
12951 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12952 community in order to replace
12956 as the default font.
12957 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12958 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12975 One difference is improved kerning.
12983 \begin_layout Itemize
12987 \begin_inset space ~
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12996 fonts in (the rare) case that
12999 \begin_inset space ~
13004 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13019 Virtual means that it
13020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13031 -glyphs from other fonts.
13032 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13054 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13060 \begin_inset Index idx
13063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13070 with the document preamble line
13071 \begin_inset Newline newline
13078 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13079 \begin_inset Newline newline
13084 will fix the guillemet problem.
13089 and that accented characters are not
13093 glyph, but built of
13097 characters, the accent and the letter.
13098 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13104 If you search for example for the French word
13105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13112 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13121 and not for the glyph
13122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13126 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13136 \begin_layout Itemize
13137 If you do not like the look of
13145 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13166 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13170 serif and typewriter fonts,
13174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13175 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13191 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13196 \begin_inset space \space{}
13204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13208 \begin_inset space \space{}
13214 \begin_inset space ~
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13232 but you can also select your own.
13233 \begin_inset Newline newline
13236 The differences between roman,
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13248 fonts are explained in section
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13255 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13260 \begin_inset Newline newline
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13271 was originally designed for newspapers.
13272 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13273 into the small newspaper columns.
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13282 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13285 \begin_layout Standard
13286 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13299 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13304 depends on the class you are using.
13305 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13309 Note that the font size is the
13314 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13315 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13316 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13317 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13320 \begin_inset space ~
13326 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13327 \begin_inset space ~
13331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13333 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13340 \begin_layout Standard
13344 \begin_inset space ~
13349 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13354 serif or typewriter.
13359 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13369 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13372 \begin_layout Standard
13377 LaTeX font encoding
13379 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13380 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13386 \begin_inset Index idx
13389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13403 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13408 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13409 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13416 \begin_layout Standard
13417 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13419 Use Old Style Figures
13423 Use True Small Caps
13426 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13429 Use Old Style Figures
13431 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13433 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13441 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13445 Use True Small Caps
13447 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13448 of scaled capitals.
13449 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13450 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13453 \begin_layout Standard
13458 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13459 a font to display the script characters.
13463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13470 \begin_inset Index idx
13473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 So this has no effect for the document language
13494 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13506 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13511 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13512 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13514 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13516 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13519 dialog, see section
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13526 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13538 \begin_layout Subsection
13542 \begin_layout Standard
13543 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13546 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13547 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13548 choose a math font in the dialog
13550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13554 \begin_inset Index idx
13557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 Document ! Settings
13564 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13565 automatically selects a math font.
13566 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13587 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13588 document font is available.
13591 \begin_layout Standard
13592 Note that the math font will not be used for
13596 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13602 or by the insertion of the command
13609 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13614 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13615 while the math characters do not.
13617 \begin_inset space ~
13620 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13623 \begin_inset space ~
13631 \begin_inset space ~
13636 in the document font settings.
13639 \begin_layout Standard
13640 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13641 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13642 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13643 font (in most cases
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13650 \begin_inset space ~
13656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13659 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13660 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13668 \begin_inset space ~
13674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13680 \begin_layout Subsection
13681 Using Different Character Styles
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \begin_inset Index idx
13695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13706 automatically changes the character style for certain
13707 paragraph environments.
13709 supports two character styles,
13718 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13722 \begin_layout Standard
13727 style, do one of the following:
13730 \begin_layout Itemize
13731 click on the toolbar button
13740 \begin_layout Itemize
13741 use the key binding
13750 \begin_layout Standard
13751 These commands are all toggles.
13756 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13759 \begin_layout Standard
13760 One typically uses the
13764 style for proper names.
13766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13773 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13781 \begin_layout Standard
13782 A more widely used character style is the
13787 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13794 \begin_layout Itemize
13795 clicking on the toolbar button
13804 \begin_layout Itemize
13805 using the keybindings
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13819 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13821 use a different font.
13824 \begin_layout Standard
13825 We've been using the
13829 style all over the place in this document.
13830 Here's one more example:
13833 \begin_layout Quotation
13836 Do not overuse character styles!
13839 \begin_layout Standard
13840 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13841 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13842 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13843 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13847 \begin_layout Standard
13848 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13858 \begin_inset space ~
13861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13867 arg "dialog-show character"
13873 \begin_layout Subsection
13874 Fine-Tuning with the
13879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13881 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13886 \begin_inset Index idx
13889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13898 \begin_layout Standard
13899 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13901 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13902 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13903 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13904 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13905 from ordinary dialog.
13908 \begin_layout Standard
13909 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13910 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13911 \begin_inset Newline newline
13914 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13915 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13918 \begin_layout Standard
13919 To use custom character styles, open the
13921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13923 \begin_inset space ~
13926 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13929 dialog or press the toolbar button
13932 arg "dialog-show character"
13936 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13937 font property that you can choose.
13938 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13941 \begin_inset space ~
13946 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13951 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13952 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13953 environments all at once.
13956 \begin_layout Standard
13957 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13960 \begin_inset space ~
13972 \begin_layout Labeling
13973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13987 The possible options are:
13991 \begin_layout Labeling
13992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13997 This is the Roman font family.
13998 Normally a serif font.
13999 It's also the default family.
14009 \begin_layout Labeling
14010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14014 \begin_inset space ~
14021 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14033 \begin_layout Labeling
14034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14041 This is the Typewriter font family.
14047 arg "font-typewriter"
14056 \begin_layout Labeling
14057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14062 This corresponds to the print weight.
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14073 This is the Medium font series.
14074 It's also the default series.
14077 \begin_layout Labeling
14078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14085 This is the Bold font series.
14098 \begin_layout Labeling
14099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14104 As the name implies.
14109 \begin_layout Labeling
14110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14115 This is the Upright font shape.
14116 It's also the default shape.
14119 \begin_layout Labeling
14120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14134 s the Italic font shape
14140 \begin_layout Labeling
14141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14148 This is the Slanted font shape
14150 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14151 , this is different from italic).
14154 \begin_layout Labeling
14155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14159 \begin_inset space ~
14166 This is the Small caps font shape
14173 \begin_layout Labeling
14174 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14179 Alters the text color.
14180 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14184 \begin_inset space ~
14189 , which means that the document default color set in
14191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14192 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14198 \begin_inset space ~
14203 is used, you can choose between
14280 \begin_inset Index idx
14283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14292 \begin_layout Labeling
14293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14299 the language of the document.
14300 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14301 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14303 \begin_inset Newline newline
14306 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14308 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14309 When using the spell checking (see section
14310 \begin_inset space ~
14314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14316 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14320 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14329 Alters the size of the font.
14330 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14331 proportional to the document font size.
14332 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14333 the details, but a general description of what
14339 \begin_layout Labeling
14340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14361 arg "font-size tiny"
14367 \begin_layout Labeling
14368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14389 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14395 \begin_layout Labeling
14396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14417 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14423 \begin_layout Labeling
14424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14445 arg "font-size small"
14451 \begin_layout Labeling
14452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14466 It's also the default size.
14470 arg "font-size normal"
14476 \begin_layout Labeling
14477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14498 arg "font-size large"
14504 \begin_layout Labeling
14505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14526 arg "font-size larger"
14532 \begin_layout Labeling
14533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14554 arg "font-size largest"
14560 \begin_layout Labeling
14561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14582 arg "font-size huge"
14588 \begin_layout Labeling
14589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14610 arg "font-size giant"
14616 \begin_layout Labeling
14617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14622 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14642 arg "font-size increase"
14648 \begin_layout Labeling
14649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14654 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14674 arg "font-size decrease"
14681 \begin_layout Standard
14686 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14687 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14689 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14690 — use those instead.
14691 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14694 \begin_layout Labeling
14695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14700 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with emphasize on
14716 This might seem like the same as
14720 , but it is actually a bit different.
14726 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14728 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14731 \begin_layout Labeling
14732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14739 This is text with Underbar on.
14745 arg "font-underline"
14751 \begin_inset Newline newline
14756 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14757 when you could not change fonts.
14758 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14759 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14760 because some people
14764 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14767 \begin_layout Labeling
14768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14772 \begin_inset space ~
14779 This is text with Double underbar on.
14785 arg "font-underunderline"
14789 \begin_inset Newline newline
14792 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14793 about double underbar.
14796 \begin_layout Labeling
14797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14801 \begin_inset space ~
14808 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14814 arg "font-underwave"
14818 \begin_inset Newline newline
14821 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14822 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14825 \begin_layout Labeling
14826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14833 This is text with Strikeout on.
14839 arg "font-strikeout"
14843 \begin_inset Newline newline
14846 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14847 changed in the meantime.
14850 \begin_layout Labeling
14851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14858 This is text with Noun on.
14865 , this is a logical attribute.
14866 Normally it's equivalent to
14869 \begin_inset space ~
14878 \begin_layout Standard
14879 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14880 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14882 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14887 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14893 arg "dialog-show character"
14896 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14897 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14900 arg "textstyle-apply"
14904 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14908 \begin_layout Standard
14909 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14916 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14917 (suppose you just set the shape to
14918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14936 \begin_inset space ~
14948 \begin_layout Standard
14949 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14957 \begin_inset space ~
14969 \begin_layout Itemize
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15000 \begin_inset Newline newline
15004 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15018 \begin_inset Note Note
15021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15022 For more on phantoms see section
15023 \begin_inset space ~
15027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15029 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15045 \begin_layout Itemize
15050 fonts use characters with serifs.
15051 These are the small
15052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15059 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15060 The following example shows the difference:
15061 \begin_inset Newline newline
15065 \begin_inset Newline newline
15070 text without serifs
15073 \begin_inset Newline newline
15076 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15077 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15084 \begin_layout Itemize
15089 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15090 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15091 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15094 \begin_layout Standard
15095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15102 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15103 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15106 \begin_inset space ~
15111 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15112 the property to be removed.
15113 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15114 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15115 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15134 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15146 \begin_inset space ~
15151 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15162 If you, for example, set
15163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15181 \begin_inset space ~
15186 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15195 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15199 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15200 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15203 \begin_layout Section
15204 Printing and Previewing
15207 \begin_layout Subsection
15211 \begin_layout Standard
15212 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15213 using \SpecialChar LyX
15214 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15215 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15216 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15217 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15219 Additional Features
15224 \begin_layout Standard
15226 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15230 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15231 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15234 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15235 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to turn your writing into printable output.
15238 This happens in two stages:
15241 \begin_layout Enumerate
15242 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15243 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15245 a file with the extension,
15246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15260 \begin_layout Enumerate
15261 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15262 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15263 to use the commands in the
15267 file to produce printable output.
15270 \begin_layout Subsection
15271 Output file formats
15272 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15284 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15292 Simple text (ASCII)
15293 \begin_inset Index idx
15296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15297 File formats ! ASCII
15305 \begin_layout Standard
15306 This file type has the extension
15307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15319 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15323 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 \begin_layout Standard
15331 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15333 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15334 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15336 \begin_inset space ~
15342 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15343 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15344 bibliography (section
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15351 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15356 If your document includes such material, use
15358 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15359 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15377 \begin_inset space ~
15381 \begin_inset space ~
15387 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15388 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15394 \begin_inset Index idx
15397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 This file type has the extension
15409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15420 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 -Errors or to process it manually
15426 with console commands.
15427 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15428 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15429 's temporary directory whenever you
15430 view or export your document.
15433 \begin_layout Standard
15434 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15435 -file using the menu
15437 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15438 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15442 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15443 export variants are explained in section
15444 \begin_inset space ~
15448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15450 reference "subsec:Export"
15457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15459 \begin_inset Index idx
15462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 \begin_layout Standard
15472 This file type has the extension
15473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15493 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15494 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15495 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15499 \begin_layout Standard
15500 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15501 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15502 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15503 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15504 when you view the DVI.
15505 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15508 \begin_layout Standard
15509 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15512 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15517 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 \begin_inset space ~
15526 The latter option uses the program
15528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15537 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15538 font access (see section
15539 \begin_inset space ~
15543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15550 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15551 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15558 \begin_inset Index idx
15561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15562 File formats ! PostScript
15570 \begin_layout Standard
15571 This file type has the extension
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15584 PostScript was developed by the company
15588 as a printer language.
15589 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15591 PostScript can be seen as a
15592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15595 programming language
15596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15599 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15604 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15611 \begin_inset Index idx
15614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15616 packages ! pstricks
15626 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15629 \begin_layout Standard
15630 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 Encapsulated PostScript
15635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 (EPS, file extension
15639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 As \SpecialChar LyX
15652 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15653 convert them in the background to EPS.
15654 If, for example, you have 50
15655 \begin_inset space ~
15658 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15660 \begin_inset space ~
15663 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15664 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15666 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15667 EPS to avoid this problem.
15670 \begin_layout Standard
15671 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15673 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15674 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15682 \begin_inset Index idx
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15692 \begin_inset Index idx
15695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15704 \begin_layout Standard
15705 This file type has the extension
15706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15722 Portable Document Format
15723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15730 was derived from PostScript.
15731 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15741 looks exactly the same.
15744 \begin_layout Standard
15745 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15749 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15753 (JPG, file extension
15754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15781 Portable Network Graphics
15782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15785 (PNG, file extension
15786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15798 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15799 converts them in the
15800 background to one of these formats.
15801 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15802 will slow down your workflow.
15803 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15807 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15809 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15815 \begin_layout Description
15817 \begin_inset space ~
15820 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15824 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15827 \begin_layout Description
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15836 ) This uses the program
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15841 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15844 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15847 is a new engine, derived from
15851 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15852 access (see section
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15859 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15864 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15865 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15870 \begin_layout Description
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15879 ) This uses the program
15884 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15890 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15891 font access (see section
15892 \begin_inset space ~
15896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15898 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15903 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15904 vertically written Japanese.
15907 \begin_layout Description
15909 \begin_inset space ~
15912 (cropped) This is the same as
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15920 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15921 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15922 to generate good-looking
15923 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15926 \begin_layout Description
15928 \begin_inset space ~
15931 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15935 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15939 \begin_layout Description
15941 \begin_inset space ~
15944 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15948 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15949 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15953 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15954 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15957 \begin_layout Standard
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15970 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15971 works without problems.
15972 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15973 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15977 \begin_inset space ~
15985 \begin_inset space ~
15990 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 FileFormats ! XHTML
16010 \begin_inset Index idx
16013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16022 \begin_layout Standard
16023 This file type has the extension
16024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16036 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16037 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16038 When \SpecialChar LyX
16039 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16040 suitable for the purpose.
16041 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16047 between different formats, which are described in section
16049 Math Output in XHTML
16054 \begin_inset space ~
16062 \begin_layout Standard
16063 XHTML output remains
16064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16071 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16072 features are supported yet.
16076 and the World Wide Web
16080 Additional Features
16082 manual, for more information.
16085 \begin_layout Standard
16086 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16088 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16089 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16095 \begin_layout Subsection
16097 \begin_inset Index idx
16100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16109 \begin_layout Standard
16110 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16111 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16120 or use the toolbar button
16127 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16128 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16129 \begin_inset space ~
16133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16135 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16139 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16141 \begin_inset space ~
16145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16147 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16152 Further output formats can be selected via
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16155 View (Other Formats)
16157 or the toolbar button
16166 \begin_layout Standard
16167 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16168 viewer window using the menu
16170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16176 Update (Other Formats)
16181 \begin_layout Standard
16182 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16185 To have a real output, export your document.
16188 \begin_layout Section
16189 A few Words about Typography
16190 \begin_inset Index idx
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16202 \begin_layout Subsection
16203 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16204 \begin_inset Index idx
16207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 \begin_inset Index idx
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16226 \begin_layout Standard
16227 In \SpecialChar LyX
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16240 character comes in four lengths: the
16252 , and the minus sign:
16253 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16259 \begin_layout Standard
16260 \begin_inset Tabular
16261 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16262 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16264 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16266 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16335 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16362 \begin_inset space ~
16365 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16372 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16399 \begin_inset space ~
16402 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16464 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16476 character multiple times in a row.
16477 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16478 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16511 \begin_layout Standard
16512 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16513 math mode and has a length of its own.
16514 Here are some examples:
16517 \begin_layout Enumerate
16518 line- and page-breaks
16519 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16529 \begin_layout Enumerate
16531 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16541 \begin_layout Enumerate
16542 Oh — there's a dash.
16543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16553 \begin_layout Enumerate
16554 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16558 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16568 \begin_layout Subsection
16570 \begin_inset Index idx
16573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16582 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16589 \begin_layout Standard
16590 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16591 but automatically in the output.
16592 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16598 \begin_inset Index idx
16601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16608 following the rules of the document language.
16611 \begin_layout Standard
16613 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16617 font and with unusual constructs, like
16618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16626 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16628 This is done with the menu
16630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16631 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16633 \begin_inset space ~
16639 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16641 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16645 \begin_layout Standard
16646 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16647 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 would then see the hyphen
16659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16666 as a hyphenation possibility.
16667 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16668 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16669 as described in section
16671 Prevent Hyphenation
16676 \begin_inset space ~
16684 \begin_layout Subsection
16686 \begin_inset Index idx
16689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16699 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16702 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16710 When \SpecialChar LyX
16711 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16712 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16714 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 appropriate amount of space.
16721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16726 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16727 gets after another word.
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16732 not work in all cases.
16734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16745 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16746 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16749 \begin_layout Standard
16750 Here are some examples of
16754 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16757 \begin_layout Itemize
16762 \begin_layout Itemize
16767 \begin_layout Standard
16768 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16771 \begin_layout Itemize
16773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16777 this is too much space!
16780 \begin_layout Itemize
16785 \begin_layout Standard
16786 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16789 \begin_layout Standard
16790 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16793 \begin_layout Enumerate
16797 \begin_inset space ~
16802 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16803 \begin_inset space ~
16807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16809 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16814 \begin_inset Index idx
16817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16818 Spaces ! inter-word
16826 \begin_layout Enumerate
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16835 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16836 \begin_inset space ~
16840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16842 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16847 \begin_inset Index idx
16850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16859 \begin_layout Enumerate
16863 \begin_inset space ~
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16871 \begin_inset space ~
16878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16880 \begin_inset space ~
16885 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16886 This function is also bound to
16889 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16896 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16899 \begin_layout Itemize
16901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16905 \begin_inset space \space{}
16908 this is too much space!
16911 \begin_layout Itemize
16912 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16916 \begin_layout Standard
16917 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16918 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16920 will take care of this.
16923 \begin_layout Standard
16924 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16928 \begin_inset space ~
16934 feature described in the section
16936 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16941 Additional Features
16946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16948 \begin_inset Index idx
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 Typography ! Quotation marks
16958 \begin_inset Index idx
16961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16962 Quotation marks | see
16966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16992 \begin_layout Standard
16994 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16995 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16996 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17006 The keyboard character,
17010 , generates this automatically.
17013 \begin_layout Standard
17014 You can specify what character the
17018 key produces by using the submenu
17024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17028 \begin_inset Index idx
17031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17032 Document ! Settings
17037 dialog and switching the
17041 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17042 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17044 \begin_inset space ~
17050 \begin_layout Labeling
17051 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17063 \begin_inset space ~
17067 \begin_inset space ~
17071 \begin_inset Quotes els
17075 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17089 \begin_inset Quotes els
17093 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17096 quotation marks (as common, e.
17097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17103 \begin_layout Labeling
17104 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17107 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17123 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17127 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17133 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17137 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17141 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17145 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17148 quotation marks (as common, e.
17149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17155 \begin_layout Labeling
17156 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17159 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17163 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17171 \begin_inset space ~
17175 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17179 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17185 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17189 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17193 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17197 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17200 quotation marks (as common, e.
17201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17207 \begin_layout Labeling
17208 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17211 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17215 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17227 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17231 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17237 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17241 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17245 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17249 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17252 quotation marks (as common, e.
17253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17259 \begin_layout Labeling
17260 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17263 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17267 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17271 \begin_inset space ~
17275 \begin_inset space ~
17279 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17283 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17289 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17293 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17297 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17301 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17304 quotation marks (as common, e.
17305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17308 g., in Switzerland)
17311 \begin_layout Labeling
17312 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17315 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17319 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17323 \begin_inset space ~
17327 \begin_inset space ~
17331 \begin_inset Quotes als
17335 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17341 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17345 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17349 \begin_inset Quotes als
17353 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17356 quotation marks (as common, e.
17357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17363 \begin_layout Labeling
17364 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17367 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17371 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17383 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17387 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17393 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17397 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17401 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17405 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17408 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17411 \begin_layout Labeling
17412 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17415 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17419 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17423 \begin_inset space ~
17427 \begin_inset space ~
17431 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17435 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17441 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17445 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17449 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17453 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17456 quotation marks (as common, e.
17457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17460 g., in Great Britain)
17463 \begin_layout Labeling
17464 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17467 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17471 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17475 \begin_inset space ~
17479 \begin_inset space ~
17483 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17487 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17493 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17497 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17501 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17505 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17508 quotation marks (as common, e.
17509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17515 \begin_layout Labeling
17516 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17519 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17523 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17531 \begin_inset space ~
17535 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17539 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17545 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17549 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17553 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17557 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17560 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17566 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17567 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17568 the inner marks differ).
17576 \begin_layout Labeling
17577 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17580 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17584 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17592 \begin_inset space ~
17596 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17600 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17606 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17610 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17614 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17618 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17621 quotation marks (as common, e.
17622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17628 \begin_layout Labeling
17629 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17632 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17636 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset space ~
17648 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17652 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17658 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17662 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17666 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17670 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17673 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17678 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17692 \begin_inset space ~
17696 \begin_inset space ~
17702 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17710 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17714 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17718 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17722 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17726 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17729 quotation marks (as common, e.
17730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17738 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17739 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17747 \begin_layout Labeling
17748 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17749 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17757 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17767 \begin_inset space ~
17773 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17781 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17785 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17789 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17793 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17797 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17800 quotation marks (as common, e.
17801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17804 g., in North Korea and China)
17808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17810 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17818 \begin_layout Standard
17819 Inner quotation marks
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17824 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17825 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17826 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17834 does not necessarily mean
17835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17843 This is why we call them
17844 \begin_inset Quotes els
17848 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17864 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17866 \begin_inset Quotes els
17870 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17873 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17876 arg "quote-insert inner"
17881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17889 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17890 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17891 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17892 If you check the setting
17894 Use dynamic quotation marks
17898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17902 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17903 they appear in a special color).
17904 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17905 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17910 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17913 \begin_layout Standard
17914 Individual quotation marks (i.
17915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17918 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17919 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17923 \begin_layout Subsection
17925 \begin_inset Index idx
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 Typography ! Ligatures
17935 \begin_inset Index idx
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17969 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17976 \begin_layout Standard
17977 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17978 print them as single characters.
17979 These groups are known as
17984 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17985 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17987 Here are the standard ligatures:
17990 \begin_layout Itemize
17994 \begin_layout Itemize
17998 \begin_layout Itemize
18002 \begin_layout Itemize
18006 \begin_layout Itemize
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18014 \begin_layout Standard
18015 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18016 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18024 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 To break a ligature, use
18042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18043 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18045 \begin_inset space ~
18052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18063 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18088 \begin_layout Subsection
18090 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18092 \begin_inset Index idx
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18105 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18112 \begin_layout Standard
18115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18116 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18120 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18123 \begin_layout Description
18125 The name of the game.
18128 \begin_layout Description
18130 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18134 \begin_layout Description
18136 The \SpecialChar TeX
18137 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18141 \begin_layout Description
18142 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18143 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18154 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18162 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18163 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18164 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18165 converges to the number
18166 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18169 : The actual version is
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 , the previous one was
18179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18190 \begin_layout Subsection
18192 \begin_inset Index idx
18195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18204 \begin_layout Standard
18205 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18206 space between two words.
18207 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 for units use the menu
18219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18220 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18230 arg "space-insert thin"
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 Here is an example to show the differences:
18240 \begin_layout Standard
18241 \begin_inset Tabular
18242 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18243 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18256 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18268 space between number and unit
18275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18284 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 half space between number and unit
18309 \begin_layout Subsection
18311 \begin_inset Index idx
18314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18323 \begin_layout Standard
18324 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18326 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18327 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18328 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18329 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18330 These bits of text became known as
18341 \begin_layout Standard
18342 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18343 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18344 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18345 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18346 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18347 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18348 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18349 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18350 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18351 \begin_inset Newline newline
18359 \begin_inset Newline newline
18367 \begin_inset Newline newline
18370 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18371 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18372 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18374 \begin_inset space ~
18378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18380 key "latexcompanion"
18386 \begin_inset space ~
18390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18397 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18398 's page break mechanism.
18401 \begin_layout Chapter
18402 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18405 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18412 \begin_layout Standard
18413 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18416 \begin_inset space ~
18422 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18425 \begin_layout Section
18427 \begin_inset Index idx
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18446 \begin_layout Standard
18448 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18451 \begin_layout Description
18454 \begin_inset space ~
18457 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18458 \begin_inset Newline newline
18462 \begin_inset Note Note
18465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18466 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18474 \begin_layout Description
18475 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18476 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18477 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18481 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18483 \begin_inset space ~
18489 \begin_inset Newline newline
18493 \begin_inset Note Comment
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18506 \begin_layout Description
18508 \begin_inset space ~
18511 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18512 set in the document settings under
18514 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18522 \begin_inset Newline newline
18526 \begin_inset Newline newline
18530 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18540 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18545 of a comment that appears in the output.
18551 \begin_inset Newline newline
18555 \begin_inset Newline newline
18558 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18561 \begin_layout Standard
18562 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18574 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18577 \begin_layout Section
18579 \begin_inset Index idx
18582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18591 name "sec:Footnotes"
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18600 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18606 or the toolbar button
18609 arg "footnote-insert"
18621 \begin_inset Graphics
18622 filename clipart/footnote.png
18631 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18632 's representation of your footnote.
18642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18661 label, the box will
18665 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18666 Clicking on the box label again will close
18679 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18680 and click on the footnote
18695 \begin_layout Standard
18696 Here is an example footnote:
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18715 position where the footnote box is placed.
18716 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18717 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18718 according to the document class.
18720 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18721 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18727 ey are described in the
18730 \begin_inset space ~
18738 \begin_layout Section
18740 \begin_inset Index idx
18743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18752 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18759 \begin_layout Standard
18760 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18762 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18766 \begin_inset space ~
18771 or the toolbar button
18774 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18800 appearing within your text.
18801 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18802 's representation of your margin
18811 \begin_layout Standard
18812 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18816 \begin_inset Marginal
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 This is a marginal note.
18829 \begin_layout Standard
18830 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18831 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18832 pages, right on odd pages.
18835 \begin_layout Standard
18836 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18839 \begin_inset space ~
18847 \begin_inset space ~
18855 \begin_layout Section
18856 Graphics and Images
18857 \begin_inset Index idx
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 \begin_inset Index idx
18870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18879 name "sec:Graphics"
18886 \begin_layout Standard
18887 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18888 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18891 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18900 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18903 \begin_layout Standard
18904 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18909 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18910 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18912 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18913 \begin_inset space ~
18917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18919 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18926 \begin_layout Standard
18931 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18932 of the image in the output.
18933 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18937 \begin_inset space ~
18941 \begin_inset space ~
18950 \begin_inset space ~
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18958 \begin_inset space ~
18963 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18964 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18972 \begin_layout Standard
18976 \begin_inset space ~
18980 \begin_inset space ~
18985 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18986 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18988 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18993 \begin_inset space ~
18998 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18999 with the image size is printed.
19002 \begin_layout Standard
19003 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19004 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19006 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19009 \begin_layout Standard
19011 \begin_inset Graphics
19012 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19020 \begin_layout Standard
19021 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19022 the image into a float, see section
19023 \begin_inset space ~
19027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19029 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19036 \begin_layout Subsection
19038 \begin_inset Index idx
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19050 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19057 \begin_layout Standard
19058 You can insert images in any known file format.
19059 But as we explained in section
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19066 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19070 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19072 therefore uses the program
19076 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19077 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19078 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19079 \begin_inset space ~
19083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19085 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19092 \begin_layout Standard
19093 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19096 \begin_layout Description
19098 \begin_inset space ~
19101 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19102 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19103 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19107 Graphics Interchange Format
19108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19111 (GIF, file extension
19112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19124 \begin_inset Index idx
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19159 Portable Network Graphics
19160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19163 (PNG, file extension
19164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19176 \begin_inset Index idx
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19211 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19215 (JPG, file extension
19216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19240 \begin_inset Index idx
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19274 \begin_layout Description
19276 \begin_inset space ~
19279 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19281 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19282 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19283 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19284 \begin_inset Newline newline
19287 Scalable image formats can be
19288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19291 Scalable Vector Graphics
19292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19295 (SVG, file extension
19296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19308 \begin_inset Index idx
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19343 Encapsulated PostScript
19344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19347 (EPS, file extension
19348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19360 \begin_inset Index idx
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19395 Portable Document Format
19396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19399 (PDF, file extension
19400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19412 \begin_inset Index idx
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19430 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19431 result will not be scalable.
19432 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19446 \begin_layout Standard
19447 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19454 \begin_layout Subsection
19455 Grouping of Image Settings
19456 \begin_inset Index idx
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 Images ! Settings grouping
19468 \begin_layout Standard
19469 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19471 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19472 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19474 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19475 need to manually change each of them.
19479 \begin_layout Standard
19480 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19483 \begin_inset space ~
19487 \begin_inset space ~
19499 \begin_inset space ~
19503 \begin_inset space ~
19509 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19510 and checking the name of the desired group.
19513 \begin_layout Section
19515 \begin_inset Index idx
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19534 \begin_layout Standard
19535 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19538 arg "tabular-insert"
19543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19547 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19548 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19549 from the rest of the table.
19550 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19551 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19553 Here is an example table:
19556 \begin_layout Standard
19558 \begin_inset Tabular
19559 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19560 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 \begin_layout Subsection
19768 \begin_layout Standard
19769 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19772 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19776 This brings up the table dialog.
19777 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19778 cursor is placed currently.
19779 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19780 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19781 done on all of your selection.
19784 \begin_layout Standard
19785 In addition to the table dialog, the
19788 \begin_inset space ~
19793 helps you in setting table properties.
19794 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19797 \begin_layout Standard
19801 \begin_inset space ~
19806 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19807 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19808 current cell respectively.
19809 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19811 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19812 of text, see section
19813 \begin_inset space ~
19817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19819 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19826 \begin_layout Standard
19827 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19828 using the check box
19837 This will merge the cells to
19841 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19842 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19843 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19844 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19845 in the last row without the upper border:
19848 \begin_layout Standard
19850 \begin_inset Tabular
19851 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19852 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19854 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 \begin_layout Standard
19988 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19989 -arguments for the table.
19990 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19991 explained in the chapter
19998 \begin_inset space ~
20004 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20005 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20006 but are visible in the output.
20009 \begin_layout Standard
20010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 Most DVI-viewers are
20022 able to display rotations.
20030 \begin_layout Standard
20035 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20040 adds lines for all cell borders.
20043 \begin_layout Subsection
20045 \begin_inset Index idx
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 Tables ! Multi-page
20055 \begin_inset Index idx
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 \begin_layout Standard
20068 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20071 \begin_inset space ~
20075 \begin_inset space ~
20083 \begin_inset space ~
20088 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20089 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20092 \begin_layout Description
20097 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20098 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20099 Except for the first page, if
20102 \begin_inset space ~
20110 \begin_layout Description
20114 \begin_inset space ~
20119 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20120 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20123 \begin_layout Description
20128 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20129 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20130 except for the last page, if
20133 \begin_inset space ~
20141 \begin_layout Description
20145 \begin_inset space ~
20150 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20151 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20154 \begin_layout Description
20155 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20156 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20162 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20165 \begin_inset space ~
20173 \begin_layout Standard
20174 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20175 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20176 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20182 In this context, first means first in this order:
20185 \begin_inset space ~
20197 \begin_inset space ~
20202 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20205 \begin_layout Standard
20207 \begin_inset Tabular
20208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20209 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20210 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20211 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20212 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20213 <row endfirsthead="true">
20214 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20225 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <row endfirsthead="true">
20245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <row endhead="true">
20278 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <row endhead="true">
20309 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <row endfoot="true">
20342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <row endlastfoot="true">
22324 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 \begin_layout Subsection
22363 \begin_inset Index idx
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22375 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22382 \begin_layout Standard
22383 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22384 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22385 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22386 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22390 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22393 \begin_layout Standard
22394 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22395 for the column in the table dialog.
22396 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22397 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22401 \begin_layout Standard
22403 \begin_inset Tabular
22404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22407 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 This is longer now.
22558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22610 This is longer now.
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 \begin_layout Standard
22642 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22643 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22649 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22655 Selection with the mouse or with
22659 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22660 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22661 the selection from outside the table.
22664 \begin_layout Section
22666 \begin_inset Index idx
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22685 \begin_layout Subsection
22689 \begin_layout Standard
22690 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22691 have a fixed location.
22693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22700 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22708 \begin_inset space ~
22713 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22714 too many notes on the current page.
22717 \begin_layout Standard
22718 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22719 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22720 and pages without text.
22721 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22722 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22723 Floats are therefore numbered.
22724 Referencing is described in section
22725 \begin_inset space ~
22729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22731 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22738 \begin_layout Standard
22739 To insert a float, use the menu
22741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22745 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22746 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22748 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22749 \begin_inset Index idx
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22759 paragraph within the float.
22760 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22761 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22762 left-clicking on the box label.
22763 A closed float box looks like this:
22764 \begin_inset Graphics
22765 filename clipart/float.png
22770 – a gray button with a red label.
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22776 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22779 \begin_layout Subsection
22781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22783 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22788 \begin_inset Index idx
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 Floats ! Figure floats
22800 \begin_layout Standard
22802 \begin_inset space ~
22806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22808 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22812 was created using the menu
22814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22815 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22821 arg "float-insert figure"
22825 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22834 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22838 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22839 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22841 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22843 \begin_inset space ~
22851 arg "layout-paragraph"
22857 \begin_layout Standard
22858 \begin_inset Float figure
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 \begin_inset Graphics
22866 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22881 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22885 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22898 \begin_layout Standard
22899 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22900 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22911 ) and refer to it using the menu
22913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22919 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22923 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22924 vague references like
22925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22932 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22933 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22943 For more about cross-references, see section
22944 \begin_inset space ~
22948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22950 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22957 \begin_layout Standard
22958 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22959 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22960 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22961 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22962 as described in section
22963 \begin_inset space ~
22967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22969 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22975 \begin_inset space ~
22979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22981 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22985 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22986 You can also set the images one below the other.
22988 \begin_inset space ~
22992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22994 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23001 reference "fig:Platypus"
23005 are the subfigures.
23008 \begin_layout Standard
23009 \begin_inset Float figure
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23019 \begin_inset Float figure
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23030 name "fig:Undefinable"
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 \begin_inset Graphics
23044 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23055 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23059 \begin_inset Float figure
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23070 name "fig:Platypus"
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23083 \begin_inset Graphics
23084 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23096 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23108 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23112 Two distorted images.
23125 \begin_layout Subsection
23127 \begin_inset Index idx
23130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 Floats ! Table floats
23139 \begin_layout Standard
23140 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23143 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23146 or the toolbar button
23149 arg "float-insert table"
23153 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23154 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23155 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23157 \begin_inset space ~
23161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23163 reference "tab:Table-float"
23170 \begin_layout Standard
23171 \begin_inset Float table
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23182 name "tab:Table-float"
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 \begin_inset Tabular
23197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23198 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23352 \end{array}\right]$
23360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23373 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23394 \begin_layout Subsection
23396 \begin_inset Index idx
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 \begin_layout Standard
23410 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23411 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23412 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23414 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23422 \begin_inset space ~
23430 \begin_layout Section
23432 \begin_inset Index idx
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 \begin_layout Standard
23446 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23448 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23449 \begin_inset space \space{}
23456 \begin_layout Standard
23457 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23458 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23464 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23465 and its alignment within the page.
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23470 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23480 height_special "totalheight"
23485 backgroundcolor "none"
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 This is a minipage.
23492 The text is set in an italic style.
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23499 another formatting.
23507 \begin_layout Standard
23508 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23511 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23515 as described in section
23516 \begin_inset space ~
23520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23522 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23527 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23533 \begin_layout Standard
23534 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23544 height_special "totalheight"
23549 backgroundcolor "none"
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23554 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23564 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23574 height_special "totalheight"
23579 backgroundcolor "none"
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23584 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23592 \begin_layout Standard
23593 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23599 \begin_layout Standard
23600 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23602 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23609 \begin_inset space ~
23617 \begin_layout Chapter
23618 Mathematical Formulas
23619 \begin_inset Index idx
23622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 \begin_inset Index idx
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23663 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23670 \begin_layout Standard
23671 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23676 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23679 \begin_layout Section
23681 \begin_inset Index idx
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23694 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23707 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23709 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23710 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23711 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23719 \begin_layout Standard
23720 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23724 \begin_inset space ~
23729 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23732 \begin_layout Standard
23733 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23734 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23737 \begin_layout Standard
23738 This is a line with an inline formula
23739 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23746 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23747 paragraph, like this one:
23748 \begin_inset Formula
23755 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23758 \begin_layout Standard
23760 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23762 For example, typing
23763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23776 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23777 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23781 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23784 \begin_inset space ~
23792 \begin_layout Subsection
23793 Navigating in Formulas
23794 \begin_inset Index idx
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 \begin_layout Standard
23807 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23808 achieved with the arrow keys.
23810 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23811 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23816 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23817 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23821 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23825 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23828 \end{array}\right]$
23836 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23841 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23842 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23845 \begin_layout Standard
23850 , printed in this document as
23851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23855 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23862 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23863 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23864 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23869 For example, if you want
23870 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23878 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23892 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23897 , since in the latter case only the
23900 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23905 will be under the square root sign:
23906 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23912 \begin_layout Standard
23913 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23915 \begin_inset Formula
23917 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23926 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23927 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23930 \begin_layout Subsection
23934 \begin_layout Standard
23935 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23936 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23940 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23941 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23942 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23943 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23944 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23948 \begin_layout Subsection
23949 Exponents and Subscripts
23950 \begin_inset Index idx
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23960 \begin_inset Index idx
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 \begin_layout Standard
23973 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23976 arg "math-superscript"
23982 arg "math-subscript"
23985 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23987 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23990 , type in a formula
23993 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24003 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24009 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24025 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24034 , you have to use an extra
24038 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24039 For example, if you want
24040 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24046 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24052 Subscripts are similar: To get
24053 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24059 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24067 \begin_layout Subsection
24069 \begin_inset Index idx
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 \begin_layout Standard
24082 Create a fraction either with the command
24088 or by using the icon
24091 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24097 \begin_inset space ~
24103 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24104 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24105 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24110 To move back up, press
24115 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24116 \begin_inset Formula
24118 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24121 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24129 \begin_layout Subsection
24131 \begin_inset Index idx
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 \begin_layout Standard
24144 Roots can be created using the
24147 \begin_inset space ~
24155 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24161 arg "math-insert \\root"
24183 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24189 always produces a square root.
24192 \begin_layout Subsection
24193 Operators with Limits
24194 \begin_inset Index idx
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 \begin_inset Index idx
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24216 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24223 \begin_layout Standard
24225 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24229 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24232 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24233 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24234 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24235 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24236 The sum operator will automatically place its
24237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24244 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24246 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24250 \begin_inset Formula
24252 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24257 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24261 \begin_layout Standard
24262 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24264 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24265 behind the operator and using the menu
24267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24268 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24270 \begin_inset space ~
24274 \begin_inset space ~
24288 \begin_layout Standard
24289 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24298 \begin_inset Index idx
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 \begin_inset Formula
24310 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24315 which will place the
24316 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24328 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24329 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24335 \begin_layout Standard
24336 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24343 Have a look at section
24344 \begin_inset space ~
24348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24350 reference "subsec:Functions"
24354 for an explanation of function macros.
24357 \begin_layout Subsection
24359 \begin_inset Index idx
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 \begin_layout Standard
24372 Most math symbols can be found in the
24375 \begin_inset space ~
24380 under one of several categories; including
24397 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24402 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24403 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24404 don't have to use the
24407 \begin_inset space ~
24412 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24414 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24417 \begin_layout Subsection
24419 \begin_inset Index idx
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_layout Standard
24432 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24438 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24444 \begin_inset space ~
24452 arg "math-insert \\space"
24456 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24457 For example, the sequence
24462 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24465 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24467 \begin_inset Graphics
24468 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24473 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24474 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24475 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24476 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24477 , because they are negative
24479 Here are two examples:
24482 \begin_layout Standard
24492 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24498 \begin_layout Standard
24508 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24514 \begin_layout Subsection
24516 \begin_inset Index idx
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24528 name "subsec:Functions"
24535 \begin_layout Standard
24539 \begin_inset space ~
24544 contains under the button
24547 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24550 a number of function macros, such as
24551 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24555 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24563 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24570 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24571 avoid confusions, because
24572 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24576 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24582 \begin_layout Standard
24583 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24585 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24589 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24595 \begin_layout Standard
24596 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24597 are placed, as described in section
24598 \begin_inset space ~
24602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24604 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24611 \begin_layout Subsection
24613 \begin_inset Index idx
24616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 \begin_layout Standard
24626 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24628 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24629 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24630 commands, for example, to enter
24631 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24634 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24635 Our example is entered by typing
24640 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24647 \begin_inset space ~
24651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24653 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24657 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24660 \begin_layout Standard
24661 \begin_inset Float table
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24672 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24676 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24686 \begin_inset Tabular
24687 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24688 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24689 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24690 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24775 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24883 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25045 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25273 \begin_layout Standard
25274 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25277 \begin_inset space ~
25285 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25288 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25292 \begin_layout Section
25293 Brackets and Delimiters
25294 \begin_inset Index idx
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 \begin_inset Index idx
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25316 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25324 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25326 For some purposes, using just the keys
25331 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25332 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25333 toolbar delimiter icon
25336 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25340 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25341 \begin_inset Formula
25343 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25351 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25352 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25356 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25359 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25365 \begin_inset Formula
25367 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25375 \begin_layout Standard
25376 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25377 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25382 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25383 left side and right side.
25384 If you use the option
25387 \begin_inset space ~
25392 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25393 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25395 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25400 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25401 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25404 \begin_layout Standard
25405 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25406 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25407 is to go inside the brackets.
25408 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25413 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25414 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25415 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25419 arg "math-delim ( )"
25425 \begin_layout Section
25426 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25427 \begin_inset Index idx
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 \begin_inset Index idx
25440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Index idx
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25464 \begin_inset space ~
25472 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25476 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25477 Here is an example:
25478 \begin_inset Formula
25480 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25489 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25490 \begin_inset space ~
25494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25496 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25501 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25502 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25503 This alignment is set in the box
25508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25557 for every column as default.
25558 For example, the sequence
25559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25570 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25571 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25572 corresponds to the relevant column.
25573 The result will look like this:
25574 \begin_inset Formula
25577 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25578 column & has & has\,right\\
25579 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25588 \begin_layout Standard
25589 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25592 arg "newline-insert newline"
25595 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25596 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25601 or the math toolbar.
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25605 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25606 It can be created with the menu
25608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25609 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25611 \begin_inset space ~
25623 Here is an example:
25624 \begin_inset Formula
25638 \begin_layout Standard
25639 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25642 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25645 arg "newline-insert newline"
25649 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25654 arg "newline-insert newline"
25657 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25665 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25666 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25667 A new row is created by every further entry of
25670 arg "newline-insert newline"
25674 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25675 Here is an example:
25676 \begin_inset Formula
25678 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25679 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25684 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25685 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25686 \begin_inset Formula
25688 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25704 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25705 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25708 reference "eq:asquared"
25713 The other types are described in section
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25720 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25727 \begin_layout Section
25728 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25729 \begin_inset Index idx
25732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 Math ! Formula numbering
25739 \begin_inset Index idx
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 Math ! Referencing formulas
25749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25751 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25758 \begin_layout Standard
25759 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25762 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25764 \begin_inset space ~
25768 \begin_inset space ~
25776 arg "math-number-toggle"
25780 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25781 within parentheses.
25782 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25783 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25784 the document class.
25785 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25786 separated by a dot:
25787 \begin_inset Formula
25797 arg "math-number-toggle"
25800 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25801 You can only number displayed formulas.
25804 \begin_layout Standard
25805 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25808 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25814 \begin_inset space ~
25822 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25825 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25826 \begin_inset Formula
25829 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25835 To number all lines use the shortcut
25838 arg "math-number-toggle"
25844 \begin_layout Standard
25845 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25848 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25849 A label is inserted with the menu
25851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25860 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25861 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25862 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25874 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25875 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25876 We inserted in the following example the label
25877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25884 in the second line:
25885 \begin_inset Formula
25887 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25888 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25893 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25894 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25895 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25899 \begin_inset space ~
25907 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25911 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25912 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25913 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25914 as the formula number:
25917 \begin_layout Standard
25918 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25921 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25928 \begin_layout Standard
25929 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25930 's cross-reference box are described in section
25931 \begin_inset space ~
25935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25937 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25942 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25950 \begin_layout Section
25951 User defined math macros
25952 \begin_inset Index idx
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25964 \begin_layout Standard
25966 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25967 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25968 Math macros are explained in section
25971 \begin_inset space ~
25983 \begin_layout Section
25987 \begin_layout Subsection
25989 \begin_inset Index idx
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26001 \begin_layout Standard
26002 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26003 To set a font in a formula, use the
26006 \begin_inset space ~
26014 arg "math-insert \\font"
26017 , or enter its command, listed in table
26018 \begin_inset space ~
26022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26024 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 \begin_inset Float table
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26043 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26047 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26057 \begin_inset Tabular
26058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26059 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26060 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26093 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26180 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26234 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26268 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26329 \begin_layout Standard
26330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26338 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26355 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26356 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26361 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26362 space when you need a space in the box.
26363 Here is an example where
26364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26375 denotes the set of numbers:
26376 \begin_inset Formula
26378 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26386 \begin_layout Standard
26387 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26388 You can, for example, put a character in
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26401 \begin_inset Newline newline
26404 So it is better not to use this feature.
26407 \begin_layout Standard
26408 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26413 \begin_inset Newline newline
26416 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26422 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26423 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26429 \begin_layout Standard
26436 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26439 \begin_layout Standard
26440 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26443 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26445 \begin_inset space ~
26453 \begin_layout Subsection
26455 \begin_inset Index idx
26458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 \begin_layout Standard
26468 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26470 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26474 \begin_inset space ~
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26486 \begin_inset space ~
26494 arg "math-insert \\font"
26498 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26499 in black instead of blue.
26500 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26501 Here is an example:
26502 \begin_inset Formula
26505 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26506 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26515 \begin_layout Subsection
26517 \begin_inset Index idx
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26529 \begin_layout Standard
26530 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26531 automatically chosen in most situations.
26549 For most characters,
26557 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26558 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26563 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26564 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26565 thinks are appropriate.
26566 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26569 arg "math-insert \\style"
26573 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26574 For example, you can set
26575 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26578 , which is normally in
26587 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26591 The four styles are used in the following example:
26594 \begin_layout Standard
26595 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26599 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26603 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26607 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26615 is set in a particular size with the menu
26617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26619 \begin_inset space ~
26624 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26625 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26626 will be adjusted to correspond.
26627 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26642 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26648 \begin_layout Section
26649 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26651 \begin_inset Index idx
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 \begin_inset Index idx
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 \begin_layout Standard
26675 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26676 that are in common use.
26679 \begin_layout Subsection
26680 Enabling AMS-Support
26683 \begin_layout Standard
26684 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26685 the document by selecting the checkbox
26688 \begin_inset space ~
26692 \begin_inset space ~
26696 \begin_inset space ~
26703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26707 \begin_inset Index idx
26710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 Document ! Settings
26719 \begin_inset space ~
26725 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26726 -errors in formulas,
26727 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26730 \begin_layout Subsection
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26734 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26739 \begin_inset Index idx
26742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26753 provides a selection of different formula types.
26755 allows you to choose between
26776 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26784 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26787 \begin_layout Chapter
26791 \begin_layout Section
26793 \begin_inset Index idx
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26805 name "sec:Cross-References"
26812 \begin_layout Standard
26813 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26814 's strengths is cross-references.
26815 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26817 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26818 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26819 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26822 \begin_layout Enumerate
26826 \begin_layout Enumerate
26827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26829 name "enu:Second-item"
26836 \begin_layout Enumerate
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26846 or by pressing the toolbar button
26853 A gray label box like this:
26854 \begin_inset Graphics
26855 filename clipart/label.png
26859 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26861 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26896 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26897 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26913 \begin_layout Standard
26914 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26919 or the toolbar button
26922 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26926 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26927 \begin_inset Graphics
26928 filename clipart/reference.png
26932 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26934 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26947 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 As an alternative to
26954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26957 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26962 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26963 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26965 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26977 \begin_layout Standard
26978 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26979 \begin_inset space ~
26983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26985 reference "enu:Second-item"
26992 \begin_layout Standard
26993 It is recommended to use a protected space
26997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 described in section
26999 \begin_inset space ~
27003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27005 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27014 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27015 line breaks between them.
27018 \begin_layout Standard
27019 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27022 \begin_layout Description
27023 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27026 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27033 \begin_layout Description
27034 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27035 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27047 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27054 \begin_layout Description
27055 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27056 \begin_inset space ~
27060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27061 LatexCommand pageref
27062 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27069 \begin_layout Description
27071 \begin_inset space ~
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27078 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27080 LatexCommand vpageref
27081 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27086 \begin_inset Newline newline
27089 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27090 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27091 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27092 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27093 it prints “on the next page”.
27094 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27097 \begin_layout Description
27099 \begin_inset space ~
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27107 \begin_inset space ~
27110 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27113 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27118 \begin_inset Newline newline
27121 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27127 ; otherwise it behaves like
27131 \begin_inset space ~
27135 \begin_inset space ~
27144 \begin_layout Description
27146 \begin_inset space ~
27149 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27150 \begin_inset Newline newline
27154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27172 \begin_inset Index idx
27175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27177 packages ! prettyref
27183 \begin_inset Index idx
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 packages ! refstyle
27199 \begin_inset Newline newline
27202 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27203 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27206 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27219 is the default and preferred because
27223 supports only English documents.
27224 The format is specified by using the command
27236 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27237 preamble of the document.
27238 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27256 \begin_inset Newline newline
27263 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27268 \begin_inset Newline newline
27279 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27280 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27282 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27283 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27288 , you might do so as follows:
27289 \begin_inset Newline newline
27296 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27301 \begin_inset Newline newline
27304 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27305 the package documentation
27306 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27308 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27314 \begin_inset Newline newline
27325 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27332 \begin_layout Description
27334 \begin_inset space ~
27337 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27339 LatexCommand nameref
27340 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27347 \begin_layout Description
27349 \begin_inset space ~
27352 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27353 label for the reference:
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27355 LatexCommand labelonly
27356 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27361 \begin_inset Newline newline
27364 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27365 Code, if you want to issue a command
27366 that \SpecialChar LyX
27372 , then you may want to use the
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27380 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27390 This is the form needed for e.
27391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27395 \begin_inset space \space{}
27402 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27403 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27405 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27409 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 You can only use the style
27418 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27422 is always possible.
27425 \begin_layout Standard
27426 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27427 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27429 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27430 \begin_inset space ~
27434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27436 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27443 \begin_layout Standard
27444 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27448 \begin_inset space ~
27452 \begin_inset space ~
27457 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27458 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27461 \begin_inset space ~
27466 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27467 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27470 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 You can change labels at any time.
27478 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27479 do not need to think about this.
27482 \begin_layout Standard
27483 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27485 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27489 \begin_layout Standard
27490 References are described in detail in the section
27491 \begin_inset space ~
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27509 \begin_layout Section
27510 Table of Contents and other Listings
27511 \begin_inset Index idx
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27521 \begin_inset Index idx
27524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 Navigating ! Outline
27531 \begin_inset Index idx
27534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27550 \begin_layout Subsection
27552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27554 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27561 \begin_layout Standard
27562 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27565 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27567 \begin_inset space ~
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27577 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27579 If you click on it, the
27583 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27584 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27585 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27587 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27589 \begin_inset space ~
27594 that is described in section
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27601 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27608 \begin_layout Standard
27609 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27610 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27612 \begin_inset space ~
27616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27618 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27622 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27624 \begin_inset space ~
27628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27630 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27634 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27636 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27639 \begin_layout Subsection
27640 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27643 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27651 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27653 You can insert them via the
27655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27659 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27662 \begin_layout Section
27663 URLs and Hyperlinks
27664 \begin_inset Index idx
27667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27674 \begin_inset Index idx
27677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27686 \begin_layout Subsection
27688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27697 \begin_layout Standard
27698 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27709 \begin_inset Flex URL
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27729 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27742 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27751 \begin_layout Subsection
27753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27755 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27763 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27768 or with the toolbar button
27775 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27784 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27785 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27788 name "LyX's homepage"
27789 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27794 , an Email address like this:
27795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27797 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27798 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27804 , or a link to a file.
27807 \begin_layout Standard
27808 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 to the link target.
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27826 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27827 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27828 the text style dialog.
27829 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27835 name "LyX's homepage"
27836 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27849 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27852 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27856 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27858 \begin_inset Newline newline
27866 \begin_inset Newline newline
27873 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27876 \begin_layout Section
27878 \begin_inset Index idx
27881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27890 name "sec:Appendices"
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 Appendices are created with the menu
27900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27912 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27913 as the appendix part of the book.
27914 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27918 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27919 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27920 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27921 and the subsection number.
27922 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27928 \begin_inset space ~
27932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27934 reference "chap:Credits"
27939 \begin_inset space ~
27943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27945 reference "subsec:Export"
27952 \begin_layout Section
27954 \begin_inset Index idx
27957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27966 name "sec:Bibliography"
27973 \begin_layout Standard
27974 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27976 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27977 \begin_inset space ~
27981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27983 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27990 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27995 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
27996 \begin_inset space ~
28000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28002 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28007 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28008 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28009 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28013 using a bibliography database.
28016 \begin_layout Standard
28017 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28018 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28022 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28023 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28024 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28025 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28026 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28029 \begin_layout Subsection
28030 The Bibliography Environment
28031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28033 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28040 \begin_layout Standard
28045 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28047 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28056 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28058 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28059 of ASCII characters only.
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28068 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28074 \begin_inset Newline newline
28078 \begin_inset Flex URL
28081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28083 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28095 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28114 or the toolbar button
28117 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28121 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28122 containing the available citations.
28123 Select one or more keys from the list and
28133 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28134 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28140 entry with surrounding brackets.
28145 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28146 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28162 Companion Second Edition
28165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28167 key "latexcompanion"
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28176 The \SpecialChar LyX
28177 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28178 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28188 \begin_layout Standard
28189 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28196 \begin_inset Index idx
28199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28219 Author A and Author B(Year)
28220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28227 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28229 Then, if you select
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28237 in the document settings
28238 \begin_inset Index idx
28241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28242 Document ! Settings
28249 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28251 \begin_inset space ~
28257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28259 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28266 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28270 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28275 \begin_inset space ~
28283 arg "layout-paragraph"
28287 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28290 \begin_layout Subsection
28291 Bibliography databases
28292 \begin_inset Index idx
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 Bibliography ! Databases
28302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28304 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28320 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28321 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28326 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28328 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28329 your working field in a database.
28330 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28331 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28332 list for that document.
28333 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28337 \begin_layout Standard
28338 The database is a text file with the file extension
28339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28350 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28351 The format is explained in
28352 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28359 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28363 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28369 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28370 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28371 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28373 \begin_inset Flex URL
28376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28378 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28386 \begin_layout Standard
28388 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28389 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28390 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28392 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28394 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28395 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28396 Those are addressed by
28401 \begin_inset Index idx
28404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28406 packages ! biblatex
28412 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28413 (although it has been significantly
28414 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28425 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28426 might conversely fail to correctly
28427 handle databases that use specific
28436 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28440 \begin_layout Standard
28441 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28446 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28452 \begin_inset Index idx
28455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28456 Document ! Settings
28468 \begin_inset space ~
28473 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28482 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28484 \begin_inset Index idx
28487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28497 \begin_layout Standard
28498 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28506 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28508 \begin_inset space ~
28514 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28515 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28523 Add bibliography to TOC
28525 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28530 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28531 in the document or just the cited references.
28534 \begin_layout Standard
28535 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28536 style file is a text file with the file extension
28537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28548 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28549 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28550 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28551 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28553 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28560 \begin_inset Newline newline
28564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28566 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28576 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28581 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28585 \begin_layout Standard
28586 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28591 \begin_inset Index idx
28594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28595 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28601 \begin_inset Index idx
28604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28606 packages ! biblatex
28614 \begin_layout Standard
28615 Accessing a database via
28619 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28627 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28629 \begin_inset space ~
28635 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28636 you cannot select a
28641 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28650 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28663 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28664 file (text file with the file extension
28665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28677 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
28679 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
28683 \begin_layout Standard
28688 styles are not set in the
28691 \begin_inset space ~
28696 dialog, but in the document settings.
28697 \begin_inset Index idx
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 Document ! Settings
28706 However, in the dialog in the
28710 field, which is only visible if you use
28714 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
28715 example how its heading will appear).
28716 These options are deescribed in detail in the
28721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28731 \begin_layout Standard
28732 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28733 \begin_inset space ~
28737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28739 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28750 Bibliography Processors
28753 \begin_layout Standard
28754 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28755 uses a bibliography processor,
28756 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
28757 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
28758 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28760 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
28761 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
28764 \begin_layout Standard
28765 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
28767 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28768 You can do this on a general level in
28770 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28771 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28772 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28775 or for individual documents in
28777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28778 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28782 The following variants are available by default:
28785 \begin_layout Description
28786 biber a specific, modern processor
28787 \begin_inset Index idx
28790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 developed exclusively for
28801 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28807 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
28812 makes use of; if you use the
28816 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28823 \begin_layout Description
28824 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28825 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28826 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
28830 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
28833 \begin_layout Description
28834 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28835 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
28839 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
28843 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28847 features are supported.
28850 \begin_layout Standard
28851 By default (with the
28857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28873 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28876 ), \SpecialChar LyX
28877 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
28890 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28891 -based bibliography styles).
28892 This should suit most needs.
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28896 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
28897 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
28898 (in \SpecialChar LyX
28903 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28904 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
28905 You can adjust it in
28907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28908 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28909 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28915 \begin_layout Standard
28916 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
28917 can add below the selection.
28918 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28919 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28939 \begin_layout Standard
28941 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
28943 These are explained in detail in section
28945 Customizing Bibliographies
28949 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28954 Additional Features
28959 \begin_layout Subsection
28961 \begin_inset Index idx
28964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28965 Bibliography ! Citation format
28971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28973 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
28980 \begin_layout Standard
28981 Many different citation formats are common, e.
28982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28986 \begin_inset space \space{}
28989 numerical citation (as
28990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28997 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
28998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 ) or author-year citations (as
29006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29015 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29019 \begin_layout Standard
29020 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29028 \begin_inset Index idx
29031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29032 Document ! Settings
29037 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29043 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29044 labels, is there to use
29047 \begin_inset space ~
29058 \begin_inset space ~
29063 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29066 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29073 \begin_layout Standard
29074 With a bibliography database (see
29075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29077 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29084 ) one has in contrary to the
29088 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29089 These style formats are available:
29092 \begin_layout Description
29094 \begin_inset space ~
29097 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29098 -based approached without any additional packages
29099 (simple numeric citations).
29102 \begin_layout Description
29103 Biblatex loads the package
29108 \begin_inset Index idx
29111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 packages ! biblatex
29118 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29120 Biblatex citation style
29124 Biblatex bibliography style
29127 Options to the package
29131 can be entered in the
29138 \begin_layout Description
29140 \begin_inset space ~
29144 \begin_inset space ~
29147 mode) loads the package
29151 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29152 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29164 behavior very closely.
29169 this option has some additional styles.
29174 styles are also supported by this variant.
29177 \begin_layout Description
29179 \begin_inset space ~
29182 (BibTeX) loads the package
29187 \begin_inset Index idx
29190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29197 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29200 \begin_layout Description
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29205 (BibTeX) loads the package
29210 \begin_inset Index idx
29213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29220 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29232 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29234 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29243 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29245 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29246 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29248 Biblatex citation style
29251 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29257 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29261 \begin_layout Standard
29262 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29263 are available in the
29268 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29269 a name prefix such as
29270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29285 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29290 \begin_inset space \space{}
29294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29305 \begin_layout Standard
29306 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29312 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29327 Here is a simple example where the text
29328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 \begin_inset space ~
29336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29339 appears after the reference:
29342 \begin_layout Quote
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29347 key "latexcompanion"
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29356 All styles except for
29360 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29370 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29375 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29376 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29377 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29382 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29383 multi-citation (so-called
29384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29387 qualified citation lists
29388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29394 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29399 dialog will display three columns in the field
29406 \begin_inset space ~
29414 \begin_inset space ~
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29428 If you double-click on an item's
29431 \begin_inset space ~
29439 \begin_inset space ~
29444 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29447 General text before
29453 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29456 \begin_layout Section
29458 \begin_inset Index idx
29461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29477 \begin_layout Standard
29478 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29487 or the toolbar button
29494 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29495 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29496 by \SpecialChar LyX
29497 as the index entry.
29500 \begin_layout Standard
29501 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29504 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29512 A light blue box labeled
29513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29524 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29525 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29531 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29532 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29533 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29535 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29537 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29545 \begin_layout Subsection
29546 Grouping Index Entries
29547 \begin_inset Index idx
29550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29562 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29563 lists under the entry
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29572 First we create the entry
29573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29581 \begin_inset space ~
29585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29587 reference "subsec:Lists"
29592 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29599 reference "sec:Itemize"
29603 , we insert the command
29606 \begin_layout Standard
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29622 \begin_layout Standard
29623 for the enumerated list in section
29624 \begin_inset space ~
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29630 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29638 The exclamation mark
29639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29646 marks the grouping levels.
29647 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29648 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29649 If we don't have an index entry for
29650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29657 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29660 \begin_layout Subsection
29662 \begin_inset Index idx
29665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29666 Index ! Page ranges
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29677 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29678 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29679 an index entry in section
29680 \begin_inset space ~
29684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29686 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29693 \begin_layout Standard
29696 Paragraph environments|(
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29700 and another entry at the end of section
29701 \begin_inset space ~
29705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29707 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29717 Paragraph environments|)
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29745 respectively start and end the index range.
29746 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
29747 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
29748 the pages of the indexed document parts.
29749 An example is the index entry
29750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29753 Document ! Settings
29754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29760 \begin_layout Subsection
29762 \begin_inset Index idx
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29766 Index ! Cross referencing
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29775 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
29776 We referred for example in the index entry
29777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29785 \begin_inset space ~
29789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29791 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
29795 ) to the index entry
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29803 in the same section using the entry
29806 \begin_layout Standard
29809 GIF|see{Image formats}
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29813 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
29815 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
29816 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
29819 \begin_layout Subsection
29821 \begin_inset Index idx
29824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29825 Index ! Entry order
29833 \begin_layout Standard
29834 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
29835 follow the rules for the index order.
29836 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
29841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29842 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
29844 \begin_inset space ~
29848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29850 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29859 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
29860 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
29861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29885 \begin_inset Index idx
29888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29889 Dummy entries ! maïs
29895 \begin_inset Index idx
29898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29899 Dummy entries ! maître
29905 \begin_inset Index idx
29908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29909 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
29914 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
29915 maïs, maison, maître.
29916 To achieve this, we use the command
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29922 previous entry@current entry
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 In our case we want to have
29927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29942 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29952 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
29953 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
29955 See the next subsection for an example.
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29959 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29965 \begin_layout Standard
29966 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
29971 to generate the index (see section
29972 \begin_inset space ~
29976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29978 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29987 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29988 -package aeguill in section
29989 \begin_inset space ~
29993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29995 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
29999 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30000 -packages although all these index
30001 commands start with
30002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30015 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30020 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30023 \begin_layout Standard
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30047 \begin_layout Subsection
30049 \begin_inset Index idx
30052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30053 Index ! Entry layout
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30063 \begin_inset Index idx
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30069 This is an italic dummy entry
30074 You can also format the page number using the character
30075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30082 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30083 -command without a backslash.
30084 We can write for example
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30090 italic page number:|textit
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30094 to get the page number in italic.
30095 \begin_inset Index idx
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30099 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30104 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30105 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30123 \begin_inset space ~
30129 Have a look at section
30130 \begin_inset space ~
30134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30136 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30140 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30153 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30157 to generate the index, see section
30158 \begin_inset space ~
30162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30164 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30173 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30178 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30182 key "latexcompanion"
30195 \begin_layout Standard
30196 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30198 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30199 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30200 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30201 If so, put the following in the preamble
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30226 \begin_layout Standard
30227 in the index entry.
30228 \begin_inset Index idx
30231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30232 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30237 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30238 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30239 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30244 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30245 a bold font for all index entries.
30246 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30258 documentation for details,
30259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30261 key "makeindex,xindy"
30269 \begin_layout Subsection
30271 \begin_inset Index idx
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30283 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30290 \begin_layout Standard
30291 If the index generation program
30295 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30296 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30300 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30301 distribution, is used.
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30310 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30311 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30312 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30313 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30314 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30324 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30326 dialog, see section
30327 \begin_inset space ~
30331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30333 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30338 The available options are listed and explained in
30339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30341 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30347 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30353 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30361 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30362 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30365 \begin_layout Subsection
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30371 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30379 next to the standard index.
30381 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30382 that add this feature.
30389 \begin_inset Index idx
30392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30394 packages ! splitidx
30399 package to generate multiple indexes.
30400 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30416 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30417 style, but it also includes
30418 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30419 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30429 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30432 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30435 and select the option
30437 Use multiple Indexes
30444 already contains the standard index
30445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30453 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30454 also appear as a heading) to the
30458 input field and press the
30463 The new index now also appears in the list.
30464 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30465 label color to the new index.
30468 \begin_layout Standard
30469 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30479 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30480 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30481 are additional features:
30484 \begin_layout Itemize
30485 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30486 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30489 \begin_layout Itemize
30490 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30491 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30499 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30500 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30501 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30502 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30505 \begin_layout Section
30506 Nomenclature/Glossary
30507 \begin_inset Index idx
30510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30517 \begin_inset Index idx
30520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30551 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30558 \begin_layout Standard
30559 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30560 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30561 called nomenclature or glossary.
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30572 \begin_inset Index idx
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30585 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30592 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30596 \begin_layout Standard
30597 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30598 and then use the menu
30600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30606 \begin_inset space ~
30611 or the toolbar button
30614 arg "nomencl-insert"
30619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30630 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30634 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30635 The first is the term or
30639 that you wish to define.
30644 of the term or symbol.
30647 \begin_layout Standard
30648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30656 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30657 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30665 \begin_layout Subsection
30666 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30667 \begin_inset Index idx
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 Nomenclature ! Layout
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30680 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30684 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30691 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30699 \begin_inset Newline newline
30707 \begin_inset Newline newline
30713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30720 character starts/ends the formula.
30721 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30722 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
30724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30734 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
30744 \begin_layout Standard
30745 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30746 -syntax is given in section
30747 \begin_inset space ~
30751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30753 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30764 \begin_inset space ~
30769 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30771 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
30772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30776 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30783 in this document is:
30784 \begin_inset Newline newline
30789 dummy entry for the character
30794 \begin_inset Newline newline
30806 \begin_inset space ~
30816 font use the command
30845 \begin_layout Standard
30846 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
30847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30851 \begin_inset space \space{}
30855 \begin_inset Newline newline
30871 \begin_inset Newline newline
30874 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
30875 This command will make the font of all symbols
30882 \begin_inset space ~
30890 \begin_layout Standard
30891 If the characters |
30892 \begin_inset space \space{}
30896 \begin_inset space \space{}
30900 \begin_inset space \space{}
30904 \begin_inset space \space{}
30908 \begin_inset space \space{}
30911 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
30912 a quote character in front of them.
30913 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30914 LatexCommand nomenclature
30915 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
30916 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
30924 \begin_layout Subsection
30925 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
30926 \begin_inset Index idx
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 Nomenclature ! Sort order
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30939 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30940 -code of the symbol
30942 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
30944 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
30947 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30948 LatexCommand nomenclature
30950 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
30958 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30962 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30963 LatexCommand nomenclature
30966 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
30972 They will be sorted by
30973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30999 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31002 will be sorted before the
31006 since the character
31007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31014 is considered in sorting.
31017 \begin_layout Standard
31018 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31021 \begin_inset space ~
31026 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31027 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31029 For the example given, you can insert
31033 in this field for the
31034 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31041 will be located before
31042 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31048 \begin_layout Standard
31049 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31064 \begin_layout Subsection
31065 Nomenclature Options
31066 \begin_inset Index idx
31069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31070 Nomenclature ! Options
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31083 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31084 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31087 \begin_layout Description
31088 refeq Appends the phrase
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31104 to every nomenclature entry, where
31110 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31113 \begin_layout Description
31114 refpage Appends the phrase
31115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31130 to every nomenclature entry, where
31136 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31139 \begin_layout Description
31140 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31143 \begin_layout Standard
31144 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31145 class options list in the
31147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31151 In this document the options
31158 \begin_layout Standard
31159 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31165 \begin_layout Standard
31166 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31167 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31172 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31175 \begin_layout Description
31185 \begin_layout Description
31188 nomrefpage Like the
31195 \begin_layout Description
31198 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31207 \begin_layout Description
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31222 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31234 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31235 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31247 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31250 \begin_inset Newline newline
31257 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31262 \begin_inset Newline newline
31266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31281 by their translation.
31284 \begin_layout Subsection
31285 Printing the Nomenclature
31286 \begin_inset Index idx
31289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31290 Nomenclature ! Printing
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31302 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31318 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31319 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31320 You can choose between these settings:
31323 \begin_layout Description
31324 Default a space of 1
31325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31331 \begin_layout Description
31333 \begin_inset space ~
31337 \begin_inset space ~
31340 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31343 \begin_layout Description
31344 Custom custom space
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31357 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31365 For example, in order to change the name to
31369 , add the following line to the preamble:
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31380 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31383 \begin_layout Subsection
31384 Nomenclature Program
31385 \begin_inset Index idx
31388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31389 Nomenclature ! Program
31395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31397 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31404 \begin_layout Standard
31410 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31411 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31413 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31418 by adding options, see section
31419 \begin_inset space ~
31423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31425 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31430 The available options are listed and explained in
31431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31433 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31441 \begin_layout Section
31443 \begin_inset Index idx
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31453 \begin_inset Index idx
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31457 Document ! Branches
31463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31465 name "sec:Branches"
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31474 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31475 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31476 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31481 allows you to put text into branches.
31482 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31483 To create a branch, either select the menu
31485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31486 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31489 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31498 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31499 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31500 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31501 and whether the name of the branch should
31502 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31503 (see below for an example).
31504 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31505 to the name of the other) and to add
31506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31518 \begin_inset space ~
31521 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31522 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31525 \begin_layout Standard
31526 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31527 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31532 where you can choose a branch.
31533 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31539 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 \begin_inset Branch Question
31547 \begin_layout Standard
31552 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31561 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31565 \begin_layout Standard
31570 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31578 \begin_layout Standard
31585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31589 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31590 Consider for example a file
31591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31598 which has the above branches.
31600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31607 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31631 branch were inactive,
31632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31647 branch was active, likewise
31648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31663 branch was active, and
31664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31667 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31671 if both branches were active.
31672 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31673 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31680 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31686 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31687 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31699 \begin_layout Standard
31700 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31717 branch is deactivated.
31723 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31729 \begin_layout Standard
31730 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
31731 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
31732 definitions for each branch.
31733 For example you can define for the question branch
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31739 -syntax, see section
31740 \begin_inset space ~
31744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31746 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31758 \begin_layout Standard
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31779 and for the answer branch
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31803 \begin_inset Branch Question
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31839 \begin_layout Standard
31840 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31844 \begin_layout Standard
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31876 \begin_layout Standard
31877 Now it is possible to use the
31881 question{\SpecialChar ldots
31888 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
31891 commands to obtain conditional output.
31892 Here is an example formula where only the
31899 \begin_inset Formula
31901 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31910 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
31921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31925 \begin_inset space \space{}
31928 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
31930 For this advanced usage, see the
31936 Flex insets and InsetLayout
31941 \begin_layout Section
31943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31945 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
31950 \begin_inset Index idx
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31966 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31969 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
31971 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31977 \begin_inset Index idx
31980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31982 packages ! hyperref
31987 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
31988 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
31989 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
31990 part of the document.
31994 \begin_layout Standard
31995 The header information in the dialog tab
31999 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32000 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32001 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32002 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32006 \begin_inset space ~
32010 \begin_inset space ~
32015 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32016 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32017 and author entries.
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32025 \begin_inset space ~
32029 \begin_inset space ~
32034 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32038 You can specify in the dialog tab
32042 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32047 \begin_inset space ~
32051 \begin_inset space ~
32055 \begin_inset space ~
32060 option allows long links to be split;
32063 \begin_inset space ~
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32079 \begin_inset space ~
32084 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32087 \begin_inset space ~
32092 colors the different links.
32093 The default colors are:
32096 \begin_layout Labeling
32097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32102 for hyperlinks and URLs
32105 \begin_layout Labeling
32106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32114 \begin_layout Labeling
32115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32123 \begin_layout Standard
32124 but you can change these in the field
32129 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32135 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32143 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32144 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32145 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32153 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32154 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32155 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32165 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32166 when opening the PDF.
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32171 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32172 \begin_inset space ~
32175 1 will only display the sections.
32178 \begin_layout Standard
32179 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32180 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32186 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32187 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32197 \begin_layout Section
32199 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32203 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32210 \begin_layout Subsection
32213 \begin_inset Index idx
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32226 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32233 \begin_layout Standard
32234 As \SpecialChar LyX
32235 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32236 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32237 commands and constructs,
32240 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32241 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32242 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32243 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32244 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32245 cannot support all packages and
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32250 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32251 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32252 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32256 Code box is created by the menu
32258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32260 \begin_inset space ~
32265 or by the toolbar button
32278 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32289 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32291 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32296 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32301 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32308 , you can write the command part
32314 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32315 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32319 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32320 Code box behind the word.
32321 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32322 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32326 \begin_layout Standard
32327 \begin_inset Graphics
32328 filename clipart/ERT.png
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32340 \begin_layout Standard
32341 This is a line with a
32345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32368 \begin_layout Standard
32369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32378 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32379 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32380 know that the command is finished.
32388 \begin_layout Subsection
32389 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32391 \begin_inset Argument 1
32394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32395 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32402 \begin_inset Index idx
32405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32415 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32423 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32424 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32425 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32426 uses in the background.
32427 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32428 is based on commands, you can
32429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32437 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32438 any time if you know the right commands.
32439 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32440 is the end of the day.
32441 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32442 all caption labels bold.
32443 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32445 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32450 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32452 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32454 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32457 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 As result you find that the package
32473 \begin_inset Index idx
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32484 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32489 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32493 \begin_inset space ~
32501 \begin_layout Standard
32506 usepackage[options]{package name}
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32510 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32511 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32512 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32513 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32517 In your case the package name is
32522 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32527 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32528 So you add the command
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32536 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 For more commands provided by the
32549 package, have a look at its documentation,
32550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32568 For example if you use a
32572 class, you don't need the package
32576 , you can instead write
32579 \begin_layout Standard
32584 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32590 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32591 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32592 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32599 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32604 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32606 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32607 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32608 Code box as described in the previous
32612 \begin_layout Standard
32613 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32614 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32619 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32627 \begin_layout Standard
32628 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32648 \begin_inset Note Note
32651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32652 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32660 \begin_layout Left Header
32661 \begin_inset Argument 1
32664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 \begin_inset Note Note
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32688 defines the header line as described below
32696 \begin_layout Center Header
32697 \begin_inset Argument 1
32700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32709 \begin_layout Right Header
32710 \begin_inset Argument 1
32713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32734 \begin_layout Left Footer
32735 \begin_inset Argument 1
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32759 \begin_layout Center Footer
32760 \begin_inset Argument 1
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 \begin_inset Newline newline
32779 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32785 \begin_layout Right Footer
32786 \begin_inset Argument 1
32789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32811 \begin_layout Section
32812 Customized Page Headers and Footers
32813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32815 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
32820 \begin_inset Index idx
32823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32824 Document ! Header/Footer line
32830 \begin_inset Index idx
32833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32843 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32858 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32870 As a second step add in the menu
32872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32882 Custom Header/Footerlines
32885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32889 This module offers the following 6
32890 \begin_inset space ~
32896 \begin_layout Description
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32902 \begin_inset space ~
32906 \begin_inset space ~
32910 \begin_inset space ~
32914 \begin_inset space ~
32920 \begin_layout Description
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32926 \begin_inset space ~
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32934 \begin_inset space ~
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32945 for the different positions in the header/footer.
32946 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
32949 \begin_layout Standard
32950 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
32951 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
32953 \begin_inset space ~
32957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32959 reference "fig:Page-layout"
32963 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
32966 \begin_layout Standard
32967 \begin_inset Float figure
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32976 \begin_inset Tabular
32977 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
32978 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32980 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32981 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
32995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33001 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33030 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33045 The normal text on the page goes here.
33046 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33048 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33049 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33063 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33092 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33144 name "fig:Page-layout"
33148 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33161 \begin_layout Standard
33162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33170 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33174 \begin_inset space ~
33179 is set to “Default”.
33180 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33189 \begin_layout Subsection
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33194 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33195 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33196 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33197 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33199 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33201 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33206 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33212 \begin_inset space ~
33220 \begin_layout Description
33223 thepage prints the current page number
33226 \begin_layout Description
33229 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33232 \begin_layout Description
33235 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33238 \begin_layout Description
33241 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33242 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33249 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33252 because it usually goes in a left header.
33255 \begin_layout Description
33258 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33259 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33261 It is normally used in the right header.
33264 \begin_layout Subsection
33265 Default header/footer
33268 \begin_layout Standard
33269 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33270 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33271 footer has the page number.
33272 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33273 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33274 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33277 \begin_inset space ~
33285 \begin_layout Subsection
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33290 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33291 Some pages are different.
33292 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33293 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33294 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33295 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33296 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33300 Header and footer decoration line
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33304 By default, you get a 0.4
33305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33308 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33309 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33321 in the following way:
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33331 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33335 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33348 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33358 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33374 Several header/footer lines
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33378 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33379 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33380 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33382 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33398 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33400 \begin_inset space ~
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33415 headheight}{height}
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33423 is a size in standard units (e.
33424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33428 \begin_inset space \space{}
33436 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33437 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33438 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33439 logfile with the menu
33441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33451 \begin_inset space ~
33456 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33461 \begin_inset Index idx
33464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33466 packages ! fancyhdr
33472 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33473 for your header/footer.
33476 \begin_layout Subsection
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33481 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33482 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33483 This example consists of the following definition:
33486 \begin_layout Description
33488 \begin_inset space ~
33497 , empty optional argument
33500 \begin_layout Description
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33505 Header empty, empty optional argument
33508 \begin_layout Description
33510 \begin_inset space ~
33519 in the optional argument
33522 \begin_layout Description
33524 \begin_inset space ~
33533 in the optional argument
33536 \begin_layout Description
33538 \begin_inset space ~
33551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33555 \begin_inset Newline newline
33559 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33566 in the optional argument
33569 \begin_layout Description
33571 \begin_inset space ~
33580 , empty optional argument
33583 \begin_layout Description
33586 headrulewidth set to 2
33587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33595 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33611 \begin_layout Standard
33612 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 pagestyle{headings}
33632 \begin_inset Note Note
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 switches back to page style with the default headings
33644 \begin_layout Section
33645 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33648 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33653 \begin_inset Index idx
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33663 \begin_inset Index idx
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33675 \begin_layout Standard
33677 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33678 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33679 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33682 \begin_layout Subsection
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33693 \begin_inset Index idx
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 packages ! preview-latex
33703 (on some systems named simply
33708 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33717 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33719 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
33727 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
33728 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33729 -package are automatically
33730 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
33734 \begin_layout Subsection
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33740 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33742 activate the option
33745 \begin_inset space ~
33752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33765 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33790 is the multiplication factor for the size.
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33794 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33815 \begin_layout Standard
33816 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
33817 and when you finish
33821 \begin_layout Standard
33822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33830 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
33831 generated by activating the option
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33840 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
33848 \begin_layout Subsection
33849 Selected document parts
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33853 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
33854 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
33855 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
33856 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33858 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
33860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33864 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
33865 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
33866 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33877 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33889 is explained in section
33891 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
33896 \begin_inset space ~
33906 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
33907 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33908 the final rotated boxes,
33909 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
33910 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
33912 Here is the result:
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33916 \begin_inset Preview
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
33933 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
33943 height_special "totalheight"
33948 backgroundcolor "none"
33951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
33982 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
33989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34004 \begin_layout Standard
34005 Previewing works also for colors.
34006 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34025 is explained in section
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34045 \begin_layout Standard
34046 \begin_inset Preview
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34076 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34096 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34102 \begin_layout Standard
34103 If \SpecialChar LyX
34104 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34105 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34106 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34107 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34108 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34109 the \SpecialChar TeX
34111 If \SpecialChar LyX
34112 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34113 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34115 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34116 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34117 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34120 \begin_layout Subsection
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34126 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34127 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34130 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34137 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34139 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34141 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34142 's main window, then only this selection
34143 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34144 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34145 the source view window.
34150 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34151 ; but note that if you have
34152 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34154 not just the one which is open at the time.
34157 \begin_layout Section
34158 Advanced Find and Replace
34159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34161 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34166 \begin_inset Index idx
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34176 \begin_inset Index idx
34179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34188 \begin_layout Subsection
34192 \begin_layout Standard
34193 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34194 allows for searching of complex,
34195 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34197 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34198 The key-features are:
34201 \begin_layout Itemize
34202 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34203 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34204 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34208 \begin_layout Itemize
34209 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34210 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34211 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34212 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34215 \begin_layout Itemize
34216 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34217 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34218 outside of mathematics environments
34221 \begin_layout Itemize
34222 Search may be widened to a specific
34227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34231 \begin_inset space ~
34234 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34235 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34242 \begin_layout Itemize
34243 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34244 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34252 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34255 \begin_layout Subsection
34259 \begin_layout Standard
34260 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34262 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34275 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34278 ) or the toolbar button
34281 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34287 Advanced Find and Replace
34292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34302 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34311 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34314 arg "paragraph-break"
34318 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34319 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34323 arg "paragraph-break"
34326 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34330 searches backwards.
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34342 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34351 \begin_inset space ~
34356 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34360 Searching for mathematics
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 Mathematical formulas, such as
34365 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34368 or something more complex like
34369 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34372 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34377 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34378 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34379 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34380 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34392 This is done by switching to the
34396 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34401 This way, entering in the
34408 \begin_layout Itemize
34409 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34410 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34413 \begin_layout Itemize
34414 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34415 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34418 \begin_layout Itemize
34419 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34420 of it only within section headings.
34421 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34422 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34426 \begin_layout Itemize
34427 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34428 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 The entries made in the
34440 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34449 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34453 button or alternatively press
34456 arg "paragraph-break"
34463 while the cursor is in the
34466 \begin_inset space ~
34474 \begin_layout Standard
34475 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34477 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34481 \begin_layout Itemize
34482 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34483 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34491 with its typewriter version
34492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34506 \begin_layout Itemize
34507 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34513 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34525 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34532 (you may want to enable the
34535 \begin_inset space ~
34543 \begin_inset space ~
34548 options and disable the
34556 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34564 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34565 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34569 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34572 , or occurrences of
34573 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34577 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34583 \begin_layout Subsection
34587 \begin_layout Standard
34588 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34593 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34595 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34597 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34607 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34613 This is done with the context menu
34615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34616 Insert Regular Expression
34618 while the cursor is in the
34623 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34624 expression matching rules
34628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34629 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34639 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34640 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34646 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34647 same text in the document.
34648 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34649 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34652 \begin_layout Enumerate
34653 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34658 editor the fraction
34659 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34663 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34666 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34667 fractions with the given denominator.
34670 \begin_layout Enumerate
34671 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34683 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34688 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34689 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34690 Also, by inserting a
34691 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34694 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34695 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34700 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34701 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34704 , and referring back to them through
34705 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34709 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
34713 For example, try searching with the regexp
34714 \begin_inset Newline newline
34717 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
34720 \begin_inset Newline newline
34723 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34739 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
34740 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
34741 sub-expressions is absolute.
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34750 always refers to the first occurrence of
34751 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34754 in all entered regexps.
34762 \begin_layout Section
34764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34766 name "sec:Spellchecking"
34771 \begin_inset Index idx
34774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34785 has a built-in spell checker.
34788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34795 key or the toolbar button
34798 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
34801 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
34802 beginning of the currently selected text.
34803 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
34804 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
34805 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
34806 scrolled so that it is visible.
34807 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
34808 n, if any could be found.
34809 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
34813 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
34814 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
34817 \begin_layout Standard
34818 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
34821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34825 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
34826 a different one at the top of the dialog.
34828 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
34829 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
34832 \begin_inset space ~
34840 arg "dialog-show character"
34843 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
34845 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
34848 \begin_layout Standard
34849 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34850 can be downloaded from here:
34851 \begin_inset Newline newline
34855 \begin_inset Flex URL
34858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34860 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
34866 \begin_inset Newline newline
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34873 files for each language.
34874 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
34875 \begin_inset space ~
34878 files into \SpecialChar LyX
34879 's installation subfolder
34887 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34889 \begin_inset Newline newline
34892 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
34893 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
34894 but in most cases these are
34910 is the language code.
34913 \begin_layout Subsection
34917 \begin_layout Standard
34920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34921 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34926 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34929 you can set the following things:
34932 \begin_layout Description
34934 \begin_inset space ~
34937 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
34938 should use for spell checking.
34939 Depending on your platform,
34953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34954 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
34955 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
34970 \begin_inset space ~
34973 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
34976 \begin_layout Description
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34981 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
34982 will always use the given language
34983 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
34986 \begin_layout Description
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34991 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
34993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34997 \begin_inset space \space{}
35001 This should normally not be needed.
35004 \begin_layout Description
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35013 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35025 \begin_layout Description
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35030 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35031 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35032 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35033 appear in a context menu.
35034 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35038 \begin_layout Description
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35051 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35055 \begin_layout Section
35057 \begin_inset Index idx
35060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35069 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35076 \begin_layout Standard
35078 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35079 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35091 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35101 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35103 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35104 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35105 which are available for many languages.
35108 \begin_layout Standard
35109 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35110 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35114 \begin_layout Subsection
35115 Setting up the thesaurus
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35127 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35131 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35136 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35142 \begin_inset space ~
35150 For instance, the US English files are named:
35153 \begin_layout Itemize
35157 \begin_layout Itemize
35161 \begin_layout Standard
35170 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35171 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35174 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35175 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35176 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35183 ) to the path where they are installed.
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35188 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35189 ies, typical locations are
35195 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35199 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35203 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35206 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35212 LibreOffice-<Version>
35219 On the Mac, the default location is
35221 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35222 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35223 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35224 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35225 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35226 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35234 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35235 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35236 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35240 \begin_layout Standard
35241 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35242 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35246 \begin_layout Itemize
35247 \begin_inset Flex URL
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35252 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35260 \begin_layout Standard
35261 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35262 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35265 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35266 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35268 \begin_inset space ~
35273 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35275 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35276 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35280 \begin_layout Standard
35281 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35283 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35286 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35292 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35295 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35296 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35305 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35306 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35308 \begin_inset space ~
35313 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35316 \begin_layout Subsection
35317 Using the thesaurus
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35321 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35326 or the toolbar button
35329 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35332 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35334 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35336 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35337 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35338 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35347 ), related terms (such as
35350 \begin_inset space ~
35359 ), compounds (such as
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35371 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35380 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35385 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35389 \begin_layout Standard
35390 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35391 the dictionary, such as the above
35395 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35400 \begin_inset space \space{}
35403 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35404 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35405 For example, looking up the word form
35409 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35414 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35419 \begin_inset space \space{}
35430 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35431 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35432 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35435 \begin_layout Section
35437 \begin_inset Index idx
35440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 \begin_inset Index idx
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35451 Document ! Change Tracking
35457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35459 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35466 \begin_layout Standard
35467 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35468 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35469 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35470 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35474 \begin_inset space ~
35477 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35488 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35502 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35503 You can change the color in
35505 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35506 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35517 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35523 \begin_inset Index idx
35526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35527 Color ! Change tracking
35532 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35533 's status bar when the
35534 cursor is in changed text.
35535 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35538 arg "changes-merge"
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35547 \begin_inset Index idx
35550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35567 \begin_inset Graphics
35568 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35576 \begin_layout Standard
35577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35584 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35595 \begin_inset Tabular
35596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35597 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35609 arg "changes-track"
35617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35628 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35630 \begin_inset space ~
35639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35648 arg "changes-output"
35656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35664 \begin_inset space ~
35667 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35707 Jumps to the next change
35713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35722 arg "change-accept"
35730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35741 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35761 arg "change-reject"
35769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35780 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35800 arg "changes-merge"
35808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35816 \begin_inset space ~
35819 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 arg "all-changes-accept"
35847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35855 \begin_inset space ~
35858 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35882 arg "all-changes-reject"
35890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35901 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35940 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35974 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35992 \begin_layout Standard
35993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36020 \begin_layout Standard
36021 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36022 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36023 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36024 the next change after the current cursor position.
36025 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36026 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36027 step to the next change.
36028 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36031 \begin_layout Standard
36032 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36033 to describe a change.
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36043 \begin_inset Index idx
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36063 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36067 \begin_layout Section
36068 Comparison of Documents
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36071 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36076 \begin_inset Index idx
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 Comparison of documents
36088 \begin_layout Standard
36089 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36096 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36097 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36099 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36101 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36147 enables the change tracking option
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36154 \begin_inset space ~
36158 \begin_inset space ~
36163 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36166 \begin_layout Section
36167 International Support
36168 \begin_inset Index idx
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36172 International support
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36182 with any language you want.
36183 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36184 up \SpecialChar LyX
36186 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36188 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36198 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36205 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36212 \begin_layout Subsection
36214 \begin_inset Index idx
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 \begin_inset Index idx
36227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36228 Document ! Settings
36234 \begin_inset Index idx
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36238 Document ! Language
36246 \begin_layout Standard
36249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36250 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36253 dialog lets you set
36255 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36260 \begin_layout Standard
36265 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36275 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36276 For details about the different encoding options see section
36277 \begin_inset space ~
36281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36283 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36290 \begin_layout Subsection
36291 Keyboard mapping configuration
36292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36294 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36301 \begin_layout Standard
36302 If you have for example a U.
36303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36306 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36307 can use an alternate keymap.
36308 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36315 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36318 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36330 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36331 which one you want to use.
36334 \begin_layout Standard
36335 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36336 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36337 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36341 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36342 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36343 one to support the characters you want.
36344 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36351 \begin_layout Chapter
36354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36356 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36363 \begin_layout Standard
36364 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36365 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36366 topic inside the user's guide.
36369 \begin_layout Section
36371 \begin_inset Index idx
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 \begin_layout Standard
36388 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36391 \begin_layout Subsection
36395 \begin_layout Standard
36396 Creates a new document.
36399 \begin_layout Subsection
36403 \begin_layout Standard
36404 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36405 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36406 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36409 \begin_layout Subsection
36413 \begin_layout Standard
36417 \begin_layout Subsection
36421 \begin_layout Standard
36422 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36423 Click there on a file to open it.
36426 \begin_layout Subsection
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 Closes the current document.
36434 \begin_layout Subsection
36438 \begin_layout Standard
36439 Closes all opened documents.
36442 \begin_layout Subsection
36446 \begin_layout Standard
36447 Saves the actual document.
36450 \begin_layout Subsection
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 Saves all opened documents.
36466 \begin_layout Subsection
36470 \begin_layout Standard
36471 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36474 \begin_layout Subsection
36478 \begin_layout Standard
36479 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36480 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36481 It is described in the section
36483 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36488 Additional Features
36493 \begin_layout Subsection
36497 \begin_layout Standard
36498 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36499 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36501 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36502 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36506 \begin_layout Standard
36507 When using the menu entry
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36515 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36532 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36533 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36536 \begin_layout Subsection
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36540 name "subsec:Export"
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36548 You can export your document to various file formats.
36549 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36551 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36552 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36553 during its configuration.
36556 \begin_layout Standard
36557 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36565 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36572 \begin_layout Description
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36581 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36586 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36587 \begin_inset Newline newline
36590 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36591 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36595 \begin_layout Description
36596 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36602 \begin_layout Description
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36607 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36613 \begin_layout Description
36614 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36615 's native DVI-format.
36616 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36617 files paths or file names in your document.
36619 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36626 \begin_layout Description
36627 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36628 in files paths or file names
36631 \begin_layout Description
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36640 ) DVI-format using the program
36642 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36645 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36657 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36665 \begin_layout Description
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36670 (cropped) the same as
36674 but with cropped page margins.
36677 \begin_layout Description
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36682 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36686 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36691 \begin_layout Description
36695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36703 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
36711 \begin_layout Description
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36720 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
36724 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
36732 \begin_layout Description
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36745 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36746 source that is compilable with the program
36748 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36752 \begin_layout Description
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36761 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36762 source, additionally all images used in the document
36763 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
36767 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
36770 \begin_layout Description
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36779 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36780 source code, additionally all images used in the document
36781 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
36789 \begin_layout Description
36793 \begin_inset space ~
36802 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36803 source that is compilable with the program
36809 \begin_layout Description
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36822 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36823 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
36829 \begin_layout Description
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36834 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
36835 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
36837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36841 \begin_inset space \space{}
36846 \begin_inset space ~
36850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36865 represent the version number)
36868 \begin_layout Description
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36877 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
36878 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
36879 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36883 \begin_layout Description
36884 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
36885 's internal XHTML engine
36888 \begin_layout Description
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36894 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36905 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
36910 For the conversion the program
36919 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36922 \begin_layout Description
36923 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
36928 \begin_layout Description
36930 \begin_inset space ~
36933 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
36935 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
36938 For the conversion the program
36947 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36950 \begin_layout Description
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36955 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
36956 For the conversion the program
36965 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36968 \begin_layout Description
36970 \begin_inset space ~
36973 (cropped) the same as
36976 \begin_inset space ~
36981 but with cropped page margins
36984 \begin_layout Description
36988 \begin_inset space ~
36993 PDF-format using the program
36997 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37000 \begin_layout Description
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37021 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37026 \begin_inset space \space{}
37029 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37033 \begin_layout Description
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37042 PDF-format using the program
37044 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37047 , produces PDF-files directly
37050 \begin_layout Description
37054 \begin_inset space ~
37059 PDF-format using the program
37063 , produces PDF-files directly
37066 \begin_layout Description
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37075 PDF-format using the program
37079 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37082 \begin_layout Description
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37091 PDF-format using the program
37096 , produces PDF-files directly
37099 \begin_layout Description
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37111 \begin_layout Description
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37124 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37125 and then exported as text using the program
37130 \begin_layout Description
37135 PostScript format using the program
37143 options see section
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37150 reference "subsec:General-output"
37157 \begin_layout Description
37158 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37159 source and also code in the statistical programming
37173 it is possible to use
37177 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37181 \begin_layout Standard
37182 If one of the menu entries
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37198 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37200 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37208 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37213 \begin_inset Index idx
37216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37217 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37232 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37241 reference "sec:Paths"
37246 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37255 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37256 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37257 's preferences as described in section
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37264 reference "subsec:Converters"
37271 \begin_layout Subsection
37272 New and Close Window
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37276 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37280 \begin_layout Subsection
37284 \begin_layout Standard
37285 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37288 \begin_layout Section
37290 \begin_inset Index idx
37293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37302 \begin_layout Subsection
37306 \begin_layout Standard
37307 Described in section
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37314 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37321 \begin_layout Subsection
37322 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37325 \begin_layout Standard
37326 Described in section
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37333 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37340 \begin_layout Subsection
37344 \begin_layout Standard
37345 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37346 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37349 \begin_layout Subsection
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37354 Selects the whole document.
37357 \begin_layout Subsection
37358 Find & Replace (Quick)
37361 \begin_layout Standard
37362 Described in section
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37376 \begin_layout Subsection
37377 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37380 \begin_layout Standard
37381 Described in section
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37395 \begin_layout Subsection
37396 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37399 \begin_layout Standard
37400 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37404 \begin_layout Subsection
37408 \begin_layout Standard
37409 Described in section
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37416 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37423 \begin_layout Subsection
37425 \begin_inset Index idx
37428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37429 Paragraph ! Settings
37437 \begin_layout Standard
37438 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37439 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37444 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37445 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37452 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37462 \begin_layout Subsection
37463 Table and Rows & Columns
37466 \begin_layout Standard
37467 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37468 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37469 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37472 \begin_layout Subsection
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37477 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37478 It will dissolve this inset.
37479 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37483 \begin_layout Subsection
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37488 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37489 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37492 \begin_layout Subsection
37493 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37496 \begin_layout Standard
37497 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37499 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37506 reference "sec:Nesting"
37511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37513 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37520 \begin_layout Subsection
37523 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37528 nts of the same type.
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37536 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37540 for an explanation.
37543 \begin_layout Section
37545 \begin_inset Index idx
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 At the bottom of the
37562 menu the opened documents are listed.
37565 \begin_layout Subsection
37566 Open/Close all Insets
37569 \begin_layout Standard
37570 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37573 \begin_layout Subsection
37574 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37577 \begin_layout Standard
37578 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 Math macros are described in the
37589 \begin_layout Subsection
37593 \begin_layout Standard
37594 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37595 \begin_inset space ~
37599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37601 reference "sec:Navigating"
37606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37608 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37615 \begin_layout Subsection
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37628 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37635 \begin_layout Subsection
37639 \begin_layout Standard
37640 Opens a window showing console messages.
37641 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37646 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37647 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37648 is processing the document.
37651 \begin_layout Subsection
37653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37655 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37660 \begin_inset Index idx
37663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37672 \begin_layout Standard
37673 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37674 All toolbars and the
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37682 can be turned on and off.
37687 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37716 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
37720 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37732 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
37736 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
37737 or when a certain feature is enabled.
37738 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
37739 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
37740 is inside a formula or table respectively.
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37745 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
37746 \begin_inset space ~
37750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37752 reference "sec:Toolbars"
37759 \begin_layout Subsection
37763 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset space ~
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37792 will split \SpecialChar LyX
37793 's main window vertically while
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37821 will split it horizontally.
37822 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
37823 to view the same document, but at different positions.
37824 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
37825 three or more documents at the same time.
37826 To close a split view, use the menu
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 Closes a split view.
37849 \begin_layout Subsection
37853 \begin_layout Standard
37854 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
37855 so that you will see nothing but your text.
37856 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
37857 's main window fullscreen.
37858 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
37859 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
37862 \begin_layout Section
37864 \begin_inset Index idx
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 \begin_layout Subsection
37880 \begin_layout Standard
37881 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
37882 \begin_inset space ~
37886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37888 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
37899 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37903 name "subsec:Special-Character"
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 Here you can insert the following characters:
37914 \begin_layout Description
37919 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
37922 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
37923 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37924 -packages you have installed.
37925 You can get a complete display by checking
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset Newline newline
37938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37946 Not all characters will be visible in the
37950 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
37951 dialog (see section
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37958 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
37962 ) can display every character.
37970 \begin_layout Description
37971 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
37975 \begin_layout Description
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37984 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37991 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
37998 \begin_layout Description
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38003 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38013 \begin_layout Description
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38018 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38028 \begin_layout Description
38030 \begin_inset space ~
38033 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38037 \begin_layout Description
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38042 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38046 \begin_layout Description
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38051 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38057 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38063 \begin_layout Description
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38068 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38072 \begin_layout Description
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38078 \begin_inset Index idx
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38088 \begin_inset Index idx
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38092 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38097 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38098 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38100 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38106 \begin_inset Index idx
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 \begin_inset Newline newline
38120 More information about this feature can be found in the
38126 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38132 \begin_layout Description
38133 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38135 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38136 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38140 \begin_layout Subsection
38144 \begin_layout Standard
38145 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38148 \begin_layout Description
38149 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38150 \begin_inset script superscript
38152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38161 \begin_layout Description
38162 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38163 \begin_inset script subscript
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 \begin_layout Description
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38179 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38180 \begin_inset space ~
38184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38186 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38193 \begin_layout Description
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38198 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38199 \begin_inset space ~
38203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38205 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38212 \begin_layout Description
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38217 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38218 \begin_inset space ~
38222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38224 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38231 \begin_layout Description
38233 \begin_inset space ~
38236 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38242 \begin_inset space \space{}
38245 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38246 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38255 To insert a fraction use the command
38260 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38264 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38273 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38280 \begin_layout Description
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38285 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38292 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38299 \begin_layout Description
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38304 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38305 \begin_inset space ~
38309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38311 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38318 \begin_layout Description
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38323 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38330 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38337 \begin_layout Description
38338 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38345 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38352 \begin_layout Description
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38357 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38358 \begin_inset space ~
38362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38364 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38371 \begin_layout Description
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38376 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38383 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38390 \begin_layout Description
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38399 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38406 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38413 \begin_layout Description
38415 \begin_inset space ~
38418 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38419 as described in section
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38426 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38433 \begin_layout Description
38435 \begin_inset space ~
38438 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38439 \begin_inset space ~
38443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38445 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38452 \begin_layout Description
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38457 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38458 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38460 \begin_inset space ~
38464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38466 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38473 \begin_layout Description
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38478 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38479 \begin_inset space ~
38483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38485 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38492 \begin_layout Description
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38498 \begin_inset space ~
38501 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38502 \begin_inset space ~
38506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38508 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38515 \begin_layout Subsection
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38545 are described in section
38546 \begin_inset space ~
38550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38552 reference "sec:toc"
38561 is described in section
38562 \begin_inset space ~
38566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38568 reference "sec:Index"
38576 is described in section
38577 \begin_inset space ~
38581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38583 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38589 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38592 is described in section
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38599 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38606 \begin_layout Subsection
38610 \begin_layout Standard
38611 To insert floats, as described in section
38612 \begin_inset space ~
38616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38618 reference "sec:Floats"
38622 and in detail the chapter
38629 \begin_inset space ~
38637 \begin_layout Subsection
38641 \begin_layout Standard
38642 To insert notes, described in section
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38649 reference "sec:Notes"
38656 \begin_layout Subsection
38660 \begin_layout Standard
38661 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38663 Branches are described in section
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38670 reference "sec:Branches"
38677 \begin_layout Subsection
38681 \begin_layout Standard
38682 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38683 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38685 An example is the document class
38686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38693 with three custom insets.
38696 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38700 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
38706 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
38709 \begin_layout Subsection
38711 \begin_inset Index idx
38714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 \begin_layout Standard
38724 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
38726 For more information see chapter
38728 External Document Parts
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38737 \begin_layout Subsection
38739 \begin_inset Index idx
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 \begin_layout Standard
38752 Inserts a box in a certain style.
38753 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38768 \begin_layout Subsection
38772 \begin_layout Standard
38777 dialog as described in section
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38784 reference "sec:Bibliography"
38791 \begin_layout Subsection
38795 \begin_layout Standard
38800 as described in section
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38807 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38814 \begin_layout Subsection
38818 \begin_layout Standard
38823 as described in section
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38830 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38837 \begin_layout Subsection
38839 \begin_inset Index idx
38842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38849 \begin_inset Index idx
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
38861 \begin_layout Standard
38862 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
38863 Floats are described in section
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38870 reference "sec:Floats"
38874 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
38876 Multi-page Captions
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38889 \begin_layout Subsection
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38894 Inserts an index entry as described in section
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38901 reference "sec:Index"
38908 \begin_layout Subsection
38912 \begin_layout Standard
38913 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38920 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38927 \begin_layout Subsection
38931 \begin_layout Standard
38932 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
38933 Tables are described in section
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38940 reference "sec:Tables"
38944 and in detail in the chapter
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38959 \begin_layout Subsection
38963 \begin_layout Standard
38969 Graphics are described in section
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38976 reference "sec:Graphics"
38983 \begin_layout Subsection
38987 \begin_layout Standard
38988 Inserts a URL as described in section
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38995 reference "subsec:URLs"
39002 \begin_layout Subsection
39006 \begin_layout Standard
39007 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39008 \begin_inset space ~
39012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39014 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39021 \begin_layout Subsection
39025 \begin_layout Standard
39026 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39033 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39040 \begin_layout Subsection
39044 \begin_layout Standard
39045 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39046 \begin_inset space ~
39050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39052 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39059 \begin_layout Subsection
39063 \begin_layout Standard
39064 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39065 title or caption of a float.
39066 Inserts a short title as described in section
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39073 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39080 \begin_layout Subsection
39085 \begin_layout Standard
39086 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39087 Code box as described in section
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39094 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39101 \begin_layout Subsection
39103 \begin_inset Index idx
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 \begin_layout Standard
39116 Inserts a program listings box.
39117 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39119 Program Code Listings
39124 \begin_inset space ~
39132 \begin_layout Subsection
39136 \begin_layout Standard
39137 Inserts the actual date.
39138 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39143 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \begin_layout Standard
39148 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39155 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39162 \begin_layout Section
39164 \begin_inset Index idx
39167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 \begin_layout Standard
39177 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39181 of the current document.
39182 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39185 \begin_layout Subsection
39189 \begin_layout Standard
39190 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39191 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39192 to jump, for example, between section
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39197 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39201 2.5 and use the submenu
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_inset space ~
39215 \begin_inset space ~
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39225 \begin_inset space ~
39231 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39235 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39241 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39244 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39247 \begin_layout Standard
39248 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39257 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39260 \begin_inset space ~
39265 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39268 \begin_layout Subsection
39269 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39272 \begin_layout Standard
39273 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39277 \begin_layout Subsection
39281 \begin_layout Standard
39282 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39283 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39284 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39300 \begin_layout Subsection
39304 \begin_layout Standard
39305 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39308 The \SpecialChar LyX
39309 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39311 \begin_inset space ~
39319 \begin_inset space ~
39324 manual for a detailed description.
39327 \begin_layout Section
39329 \begin_inset Index idx
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39341 \begin_layout Subsection
39345 \begin_layout Standard
39346 Change Tracking is described in section
39347 \begin_inset space ~
39351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39353 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39360 \begin_layout Subsection
39368 \begin_layout Standard
39369 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39370 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39371 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39373 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39374 to the clipboard or update the view.
39375 \begin_inset Newline newline
39378 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39385 Open Containing Directory
39387 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39388 's temporary folder for the document.
39389 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39390 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39391 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39392 For example some journals require to send the
39396 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39400 \begin_layout Subsection
39401 Start Appendix Here
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39405 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39406 as described in section
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39413 reference "sec:Appendices"
39420 \begin_layout Subsection
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39429 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39430 default output format for the document (menu
39432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39433 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39434 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39452 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39456 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39465 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39470 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset space ~
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39488 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39492 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39493 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39496 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39501 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39506 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39510 \begin_inset space ~
39514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39516 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39521 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39522 when it is first configured.
39523 The default output format is
39526 \begin_inset space ~
39534 \begin_layout Subsection
39535 View (Other Formats)
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39539 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39540 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39541 actual document with an external program.
39542 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39543 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39544 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39546 All possible formats are listed in section
39547 \begin_inset space ~
39551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39553 reference "subsec:Export"
39558 You should at least see the menu entry
39563 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39565 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39573 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39578 \begin_inset Index idx
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39582 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39593 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39595 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39596 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39601 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39603 \begin_inset space ~
39606 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39610 \begin_inset space ~
39614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39616 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39621 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39622 when it is first configured.
39625 \begin_layout Subsection
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39633 \begin_layout Standard
39634 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39635 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39638 \begin_layout Subsection
39639 Update (Other Formats)
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39644 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39647 \begin_layout Subsection
39648 View Master Document
39651 \begin_layout Standard
39652 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39673 manual for more information on this topic).
39674 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39675 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39688 generates the output of the whole book, while
39692 will just output the chapter alone.
39695 \begin_layout Standard
39696 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39697 in the document settings (menu
39699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39700 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39701 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39719 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39723 ) or in the preferences (menu
39725 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39726 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39731 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39736 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39748 \begin_inset space ~
39752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39754 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39761 \begin_layout Subsection
39762 Update Master Document
39765 \begin_layout Standard
39766 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39787 manual for more information on this topic).
39788 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
39789 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
39792 \begin_layout Standard
39793 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39794 in the document settings (menu
39796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39797 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39798 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39804 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39816 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39820 ) or in the preferences (menu
39822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39823 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39828 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39833 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39851 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39858 \begin_layout Subsection
39860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39862 name "subsec:Compressed"
39869 \begin_layout Standard
39870 Un/compresses the current document.
39871 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
39872 compression (see the
39874 Additional Features
39876 manual for details).
39879 \begin_layout Subsection
39883 \begin_layout Standard
39884 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
39887 \begin_layout Subsection
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 The document settings are described in appendix
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39899 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39906 \begin_layout Section
39908 \begin_inset Index idx
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_layout Standard
39925 Spell checking is explained in section
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39932 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
39939 \begin_layout Subsection
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39944 The thesaurus is described in section
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39951 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
39958 \begin_layout Subsection
39960 \begin_inset Index idx
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 \begin_inset Index idx
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39982 \begin_layout Standard
39983 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
39984 the highlighted document part.
39987 \begin_layout Subsection
39993 \begin_inset Index idx
39996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39997 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40006 \begin_layout Standard
40007 Generates with the help of the program
40009 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40012 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40013 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40014 This feature is not available on Windows.
40017 \begin_layout Subsection
40023 \begin_inset Index idx
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40036 \begin_layout Standard
40037 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40047 to see the full filename paths.
40050 \begin_layout Subsection
40052 \begin_inset Index idx
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40064 \begin_layout Standard
40065 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40066 files as described in section
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40073 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40080 \begin_layout Subsection
40082 \begin_inset Index idx
40085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40098 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40116 \begin_inset Index idx
40119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40130 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40131 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40132 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40133 -packages and programs it needs; see
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40141 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40148 \begin_layout Subsection
40152 \begin_layout Standard
40157 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40158 \begin_inset space ~
40162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40164 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40171 \begin_layout Section
40173 \begin_inset Index idx
40176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40186 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40187 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40189 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40202 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40203 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40204 packages and classes found
40205 by \SpecialChar LyX
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40213 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40229 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40234 \begin_layout Section
40236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40238 name "sec:Toolbars"
40245 \begin_layout Standard
40246 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40253 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40260 \begin_layout Standard
40261 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40262 This is described in the
40264 Additional Features
40269 \begin_layout Subsection
40271 \begin_inset Index idx
40274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40284 \begin_inset Graphics
40285 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40293 \begin_layout Standard
40294 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40318 \begin_inset Note Note
40321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40322 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40327 manual for more information.
40335 \begin_layout Standard
40336 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40342 \begin_layout Standard
40343 \begin_inset Tabular
40344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40345 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40353 \begin_inset Graphics
40354 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40368 pull-down box for the environments
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40388 \begin_layout Standard
40390 \begin_inset Tabular
40391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40392 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40393 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40394 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40418 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40448 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40478 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40494 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40524 arg "spelling-continuously"
40532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40536 Spellcheck continuously
40542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40685 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40701 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
40709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40741 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40783 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
40791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40797 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40798 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
40805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 Emphasize text, function of the
40828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40833 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40863 Set text to noun style, function of the
40865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 arg "textstyle-apply"
40896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40900 Format text using the current settings in the
40902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40907 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40940 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40960 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
40968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40988 arg "tabular-insert"
40996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41018 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 Toggle outline window on/off,
41032 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41048 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41075 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41087 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41100 \begin_layout Subsection
41102 \begin_inset Index idx
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41114 \begin_layout Standard
41115 \begin_inset Graphics
41116 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41124 \begin_layout Standard
41125 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41132 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41136 \begin_layout Standard
41137 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41143 \begin_layout Standard
41144 \begin_inset Tabular
41145 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41146 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41147 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41148 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 arg "layout Enumerate"
41193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41212 arg "layout Itemize"
41220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41266 arg "layout Description"
41274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41293 arg "depth-increment"
41301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 arg "depth-decrement"
41339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41369 arg "float-insert figure"
41377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41384 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41400 arg "float-insert table"
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41415 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41461 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41491 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 arg "nomencl-insert"
41563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 arg "footnote-insert"
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41619 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41668 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41688 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41782 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
41790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41797 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41813 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
41821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41848 arg "dialog-show character"
41856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41867 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41883 arg "layout-paragraph"
41891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41917 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41945 \begin_layout Subsection
41946 View/Update Toolbar
41947 \begin_inset Index idx
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41951 Toolbar ! View / Update
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 \begin_inset Graphics
41961 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
41968 \begin_layout Standard
41969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41981 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41987 \begin_layout Standard
41988 \begin_inset Tabular
41989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
41990 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41991 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41992 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42032 arg "buffer-update"
42040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42062 arg "master-buffer-view"
42070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 arg "master-buffer-update"
42104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42116 \begin_inset space ~
42125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42134 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42150 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42151 Synchronize with Output
42157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42181 View (Other Formats)
42187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42194 arg "update-others"
42202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42209 Update (Other Formats)
42222 \begin_layout Standard
42223 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42227 \begin_layout Subsection
42231 \begin_layout Standard
42232 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42239 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42243 , the table toolbar
42244 \begin_inset Index idx
42247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42261 manual and the math macro toolbar
42262 \begin_inset Index idx
42265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42278 \begin_layout Chapter
42279 The Document Settings
42280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42282 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42287 \begin_inset Index idx
42290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42291 Document ! Settings
42299 \begin_layout Standard
42303 \begin_inset space ~
42308 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42309 is called with the menu
42311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42315 You can save your document settings as default with the
42317 Save as Document Defaults
42319 button in any dialog.
42320 This will create a template named
42324 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42325 when you create a new document without
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42334 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42335 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42338 \begin_layout Standard
42339 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42340 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42341 to find the one you are looking for.
42342 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42343 the submenus of the dialog.
42345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42349 \begin_inset space \space{}
42353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42360 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42361 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42362 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42365 \begin_layout Section
42369 \begin_layout Standard
42370 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42372 Document classes are described in section
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42379 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42387 \begin_layout Standard
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42396 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42401 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42402 as a layout for a document class.
42403 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42405 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42414 \begin_layout Standard
42415 Some classes use special class options by default.
42416 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42420 and you can decide to use them or not.
42421 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42422 recommended you leave them untouched.
42427 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42428 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42433 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42435 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42442 \begin_inset Newline newline
42447 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42450 \begin_inset Newline newline
42453 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42454 distribution, see section
42459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42461 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42474 \begin_layout Standard
42479 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42480 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42481 in the background if the child document
42482 is opened without its master.
42483 This way child documents are always compilable.
42484 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42499 \begin_layout Standard
42500 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42511 \begin_inset Index idx
42514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 packages ! prettyref
42522 \begin_inset Index idx
42525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42527 packages ! refstyle
42532 for cross-references, see section
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42539 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42546 \begin_layout Section
42550 \begin_layout Standard
42551 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42552 Please refer to the section
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42563 \begin_inset space ~
42568 manual for details.
42571 \begin_layout Section
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 Modules are explained in section
42577 \begin_inset space ~
42581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42583 reference "subsec:Modules"
42590 \begin_layout Section
42594 \begin_layout Standard
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42602 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42609 \begin_layout Section
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42614 The document font settings are described in section
42615 \begin_inset space ~
42619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42621 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42628 \begin_layout Section
42632 \begin_layout Standard
42633 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42645 \begin_inset space ~
42650 and whether it should be a
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42658 can also be specified here.
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42663 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42664 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42666 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42669 \begin_layout Standard
42672 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42675 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42676 justifies the text on screen.
42677 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42681 \begin_layout Section
42685 \begin_layout Standard
42686 This dialog is described in sections
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42693 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42700 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
42707 \begin_layout Section
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42712 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42719 reference "subsec:Margins"
42726 \begin_layout Section
42728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42730 name "sec:Language-encodings"
42735 \begin_inset Index idx
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42739 Language ! Encoding
42747 \begin_layout Standard
42748 The document language and quote styles are set here.
42749 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
42750 (the \SpecialChar LyX
42752 is always encoded in utf8).
42753 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
42754 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
42755 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42756 -command is not known for
42757 a particular character).
42760 \begin_layout Standard
42761 If you use the option
42766 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
42767 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
42768 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42770 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
42771 exactly one encoding.
42772 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42777 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
42778 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
42779 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42780 installation supports Unicode), choose
42781 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
42782 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42783 is quite incomplete, so
42784 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
42789 (when \SpecialChar LyX
42790 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42791 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
42792 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42793 -commands is not used, because all
42794 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
42795 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42796 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42797 , two new alternative engines
42798 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42800 Both engines support Unicode natively.
42802 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42833 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42838 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
42842 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42849 \begin_inset space ~
42854 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42855 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
42857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42865 The possible settings are:
42868 \begin_layout Description
42869 Default uses the language package that is selected in
42871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42876 \begin_inset space ~
42880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42882 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
42889 \begin_layout Description
42890 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
42891 format you will use.
42892 In many cases this will be
42897 \begin_inset Index idx
42900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42908 If the newer package
42913 \begin_inset Index idx
42916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42918 packages ! polyglossia
42923 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42924 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42925 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
42927 this package will be used instead of
42934 \begin_layout Description
42936 \begin_inset space ~
42947 would be more appropriate.
42950 \begin_layout Description
42951 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42952 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42956 (for German texts), type in
42959 \begin_inset Newline newline
42964 usepackage{ngerman}
42967 \begin_layout Description
42968 None will not use a language package.
42969 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42973 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42976 \begin_layout Description
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42986 \begin_inset space ~
42993 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42999 \begin_inset Index idx
43002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43004 packages ! inputenc
43010 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43011 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43012 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43016 \begin_layout Description
43017 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43019 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43020 commands, which may result in a big
43021 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43022 -commands are needed.
43025 \begin_layout Description
43027 \begin_inset space ~
43031 \begin_inset space ~
43034 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43037 \begin_layout Description
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43046 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43049 \begin_layout Description
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43054 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43057 \begin_layout Description
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43066 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43067 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43070 \begin_layout Description
43072 \begin_inset space ~
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43079 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43083 \begin_layout Description
43085 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43092 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43093 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43096 \begin_layout Description
43098 \begin_inset space ~
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43109 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43110 \begin_inset space ~
43116 \begin_layout Description
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43122 \begin_inset space ~
43126 \begin_inset space ~
43129 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43130 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43133 \begin_layout Description
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43139 \begin_inset space ~
43142 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43143 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43144 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43145 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43156 \begin_layout Description
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43165 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43166 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43167 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43169 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43170 \begin_inset space ~
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_layout Description
43182 \begin_inset space ~
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43189 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43192 \begin_layout Description
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43198 \begin_inset space ~
43201 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43204 \begin_layout Description
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43210 \begin_inset space ~
43213 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43216 \begin_layout Description
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43221 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43224 \begin_layout Description
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43229 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43232 \begin_layout Description
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43238 \begin_inset space ~
43241 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43244 \begin_layout Description
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43256 \begin_layout Description
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43262 \begin_inset space ~
43265 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43268 \begin_layout Description
43270 \begin_inset space ~
43274 \begin_inset space ~
43280 \begin_layout Description
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43289 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43295 \begin_inset Index idx
43298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43305 , when using this, set the document language to
43310 \begin_layout Description
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43319 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43324 , when using this, set the document language to
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_layout Description
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43342 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43348 \begin_inset Index idx
43351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43353 packages ! japanese
43358 , when using this, set the document language to
43363 \begin_layout Description
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43372 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43377 , when using this, set the document language to
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43391 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43396 , when using this, set the document language to
43401 \begin_layout Description
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43406 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43409 \begin_layout Description
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_inset space ~
43422 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43425 \begin_layout Description
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43438 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43439 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43440 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43443 \begin_layout Description
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43455 \begin_layout Description
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43464 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43465 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43468 \begin_layout Description
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43477 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43483 \begin_inset Index idx
43486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43496 \begin_layout Description
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43509 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43516 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43519 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43526 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43527 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43529 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43532 \begin_layout Description
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_inset space ~
43541 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43547 \begin_inset Index idx
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43557 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43560 \begin_layout Description
43562 \begin_inset space ~
43565 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43571 \begin_inset Index idx
43574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43576 packages ! inputenc
43582 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43586 \begin_layout Description
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43592 \begin_inset space ~
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43599 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_layout Description
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43616 \begin_inset space ~
43619 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43620 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43621 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43625 \begin_layout Description
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43638 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43639 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43642 \begin_layout Section
43644 \begin_inset Index idx
43647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43654 \begin_inset Index idx
43657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 \begin_inset Index idx
43667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43668 Color ! Shaded boxes
43674 \begin_inset Index idx
43677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43678 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43686 \begin_layout Standard
43687 Here you can alter the font color for the
43691 (default: black), for
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43699 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
43703 (default: white) and for
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43716 sets the color back to the default.
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Clicking any button showing
43728 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
43729 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
43730 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
43731 later more quickly.
43734 \begin_layout Standard
43735 Note, if you change the
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43743 font color and use the option
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43751 in the document settings under
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43759 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43766 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43773 \begin_layout Standard
43774 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43793 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 Code after a forced page break:
43802 \begin_layout Itemize
43803 For the page color:
43804 \begin_inset Newline newline
43811 pagecolor{color name}
43814 \begin_layout Itemize
43815 For the text color:
43816 \begin_inset Newline newline
43826 \begin_layout Standard
43827 You are restricted to one of
43863 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43876 \begin_inset Newline newline
43879 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
43880 names to refer to them:
43883 \begin_layout Itemize
43889 \begin_inset Newline newline
43894 page_backgroundcolor
43897 \begin_layout Itemize
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset Newline newline
43915 \begin_layout Itemize
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset Newline newline
43933 \begin_layout Itemize
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_inset Newline newline
43951 \begin_layout Standard
43952 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43971 \begin_layout Section
43975 \begin_layout Standard
43976 Here you can adjust the
43980 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
43984 as described in section
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43991 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
43998 \begin_layout Section
44002 \begin_layout Standard
44003 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44009 \begin_inset Index idx
44012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44014 packages ! biblatex
44024 \begin_inset Index idx
44027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44039 \begin_inset Index idx
44042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44050 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44053 Sectioned bibliography
44055 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44061 \begin_inset Index idx
44064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 packages ! bibtopic
44076 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44077 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44081 for the generation of the bibliography.
44082 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44089 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44096 \begin_layout Section
44100 \begin_layout Standard
44101 Here you can define the
44105 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44113 reference "sec:Index"
44120 \begin_layout Section
44124 \begin_layout Standard
44125 The PDF properties are explained in section
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44132 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44139 \begin_layout Section
44143 \begin_layout Standard
44144 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44145 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44151 \begin_inset Index idx
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 \begin_inset Index idx
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 \begin_inset Index idx
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44196 \begin_inset Index idx
44199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44211 \begin_inset Index idx
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 packages ! mathdots
44226 \begin_inset Index idx
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 packages ! mathtools
44241 \begin_inset Index idx
44244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44256 \begin_inset Index idx
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44261 packages ! stackrel
44271 \begin_inset Index idx
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44276 packages ! stmaryrd
44286 \begin_inset Index idx
44289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 packages ! undertilde
44296 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44299 \begin_layout Description
44300 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44301 -errors in formulas,
44302 ensure that you have this enabled.
44305 \begin_layout Description
44306 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44307 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44308 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44312 \begin_layout Description
44313 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_layout Description
44329 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44344 \begin_layout Description
44345 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44356 \begin_layout Description
44357 mathtools is used for the math commands
44393 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44400 \begin_layout Description
44401 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44403 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44412 \begin_layout Description
44413 stackrel is used for the math command
44430 \begin_layout Description
44431 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44434 \begin_layout Description
44435 undertilde is used for the math command
44443 Accents for one Character
44452 \begin_layout Section
44456 \begin_layout Standard
44457 The float placement options are described in the section
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_layout Section
44480 \begin_layout Standard
44481 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44483 Program Code Listings
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44496 \begin_layout Section
44500 \begin_layout Standard
44501 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44509 set to be used and set the
44514 The itemize environment is described in section
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44521 reference "sec:Itemize"
44528 \begin_layout Standard
44529 You can furthermore specify a
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44537 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44538 command of the desired character.
44539 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44546 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44552 \begin_inset space \space{}
44556 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44566 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44567 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44570 \begin_layout Standard
44571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44580 -packages in the preamble (menu
44583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44593 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44597 usepackage{textcomp}
44600 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44604 usepackage{amssymb}
44614 \begin_layout Section
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 Branches are described in section
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44626 reference "sec:Branches"
44633 \begin_layout Section
44635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44637 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44644 \begin_layout Standard
44645 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44648 \begin_layout Description
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44657 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44677 View Master Document
44678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44685 Update Master Document
44686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44693 menu or the toolbar.
44694 The default is set in
44696 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44697 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44702 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44712 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44719 \begin_layout Description
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44728 Output settings for the menu
44730 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44738 For a detailed description see section
44740 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44753 \begin_layout Description
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44762 Options offers settings for the export format
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44775 will assure that the output follows exactly version
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44779 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44788 settings are described in detail in section
44790 Math Output in XHTML
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44808 \begin_inset space ~
44813 is used for the size of equations in the output.
44816 \begin_layout Description
44818 \begin_inset space ~
44823 Save transient properties
44825 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
44826 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
44827 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
44831 \begin_layout Itemize
44832 the activation of change tracking
44835 \begin_layout Itemize
44836 the output of tracked changes
44839 \begin_layout Itemize
44840 the recording of the document directory path.
44843 \begin_layout Standard
44844 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
44845 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
44849 \begin_layout Section
44857 \begin_layout Standard
44858 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44860 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
44862 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44864 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
44868 \begin_layout Standard
44869 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44870 -syntax is given in section
44871 \begin_inset space ~
44875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44877 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
44884 \begin_layout Chapter
44890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44892 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44897 \begin_inset Index idx
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44910 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
44912 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44916 It has the following submenus.
44919 \begin_layout Section
44923 \begin_layout Subsection
44927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44928 User Interface File
44929 \begin_inset Index idx
44932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 Customization ! of toolbars
44939 \begin_inset Index idx
44942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44943 Customization ! of menus
44951 \begin_layout Standard
44952 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44953 interface (ui) file.
44954 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44962 \begin_layout Description
44967 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
44970 \begin_layout Description
44977 the menu entries in popup context menus
44980 \begin_layout Description
44985 specifies the toolbar buttons
44988 \begin_layout Standard
44989 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
44990 and edit the entries.
44993 \begin_layout Standard
44994 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45006 entries must be finished with an explicit
45031 and in the case of the
45032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45044 The syntax for the entries is:
45047 \begin_layout Standard
45048 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45077 \begin_layout Standard
45079 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45082 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45083 -functions are listed in the menu
45085 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45095 \begin_layout Standard
45096 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45102 \begin_layout Standard
45103 For example, assuming you use the menu
45105 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45108 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45112 \begin_layout Standard
45113 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45137 \begin_layout Standard
45139 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45154 to have the sixth bookmark.
45157 \begin_layout Standard
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45166 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45167 's toolbar buttons.
45168 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45172 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45184 \begin_layout Standard
45187 Enable tool tips in main work area
45189 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45202 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45203 should display in the menu
45205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_layout Subsection
45219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45223 \begin_layout Standard
45226 Restore window layouts and geometries
45229 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45230 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45234 \begin_layout Standard
45237 Restore cursor positions
45239 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45243 \begin_layout Standard
45246 Load opened files from last session
45248 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45252 \begin_layout Standard
45255 Clear all session information
45257 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45258 sessions (cursor positions, names
45259 of last opened documents, etc.).
45262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45266 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45271 \begin_inset Index idx
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45286 Backup original documents when saving
45288 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45289 it was saved the last time.
45290 It is stored in the
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45299 \begin_inset space ~
45303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45305 reference "sec:Paths"
45309 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45318 The backup file has the file extension
45319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45333 \begin_layout Standard
45336 Backup documents, every
45338 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45341 \begin_layout Standard
45344 Save documents compressed by default
45346 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45353 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45358 This applies to newly created documents only.
45359 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45363 Windows & work area
45366 \begin_layout Standard
45369 Open documents in tabs
45371 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45375 \begin_layout Standard
45380 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 \begin_inset space ~
45391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45393 reference "sec:Paths"
45397 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45404 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45405 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45406 of \SpecialChar LyX
45408 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45409 instance is created for each file.
45412 \begin_layout Standard
45415 Single close-tab button
45417 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45427 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45428 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45429 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45433 \begin_layout Standard
45434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45443 before the change takes effect.
45451 \begin_layout Standard
45456 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45458 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45460 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45464 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45465 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45466 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45469 \begin_layout Subsection
45471 \begin_inset Index idx
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45483 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45491 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45495 \begin_layout Standard
45496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 This section only deals with the fonts
45508 the \SpecialChar LyX
45510 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45525 \begin_layout Standard
45526 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45543 (depends on the system) as its
45546 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_layout Standard
45563 You can change the font size with the
45570 \begin_layout Standard
45575 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45580 points have the size of 1
45581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45591 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45596 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45601 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45602 \begin_inset space ~
45606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45608 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45615 \begin_layout Standard
45618 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45620 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45621 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45622 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45623 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45624 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45626 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45633 \begin_layout Subsection
45635 \begin_inset Index idx
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45646 \begin_inset Index idx
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 \begin_layout Standard
45659 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45660 by choosing an item in the
45661 list and selecting the
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45669 By checking the option
45673 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45676 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45681 \begin_inset space ~
45686 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45689 \begin_layout Subsection
45691 \begin_inset Index idx
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 \begin_layout Standard
45704 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
45708 \begin_layout Standard
45713 enables previewing snippets of your document.
45714 This feature is described in section
45715 \begin_inset space ~
45719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45721 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
45728 \begin_layout Standard
45729 Checking the option
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45745 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
45748 \begin_layout Section
45750 \begin_inset Index idx
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 \begin_layout Subsection
45766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45770 \begin_layout Standard
45773 Cursor follows scrollbar
45775 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45780 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
45781 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
45782 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
45785 \begin_layout Standard
45788 Scroll below end of document
45790 is self-explanatory.
45793 \begin_layout Standard
45794 In \SpecialChar LyX
45795 one can jump from word to word by pressing
45802 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
45804 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
45805 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
45808 \begin_layout Standard
45811 Sort environments alphabetically
45813 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45816 \begin_layout Standard
45819 Group environments by their category
45821 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45829 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
45840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45844 \begin_layout Standard
45845 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
45850 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
45851 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
45855 \begin_layout Subsection
45857 \begin_inset Index idx
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 \begin_inset Index idx
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 Settings ! Shortcuts
45879 \begin_layout Standard
45884 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
45886 Several binding files are available, among them:
45889 \begin_layout Description
45890 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
45893 \begin_layout Description
45894 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
45906 \begin_layout Description
45907 mac.bind a set of bindings for
45910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45918 \begin_layout Standard
45919 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
45924 , and binding files for special languages.
45925 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
45926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45930 \begin_inset space \space{}
45934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45942 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
45943 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
45944 will try to use the appropriate binding
45948 \begin_layout Standard
45949 Some binding files, like
45953 , only have a limited scope.
45954 When looking at the end of the file
45958 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset space ~
45974 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
45975 in the selected key binding file.
45978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45982 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
45987 \begin_inset Index idx
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 Key Bindings ! Editing
45999 \begin_layout Standard
46000 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46001 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46002 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46003 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46006 Show key-bindings containing
46009 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46010 Insert there for example as keyword
46011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46018 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46019 functions that contain
46020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46028 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46029 All \SpecialChar LyX
46030 functions are also listed in the file
46035 that you will find in the
46042 \begin_layout Standard
46043 For example, to add the shortcut
46051 , select the function and press the
46056 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46057 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46060 \begin_layout Standard
46061 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46062 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46064 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46065 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46067 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46076 \begin_layout Standard
46077 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46079 The syntax of the entries is:
46082 \begin_layout Standard
46088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46107 \begin_layout Subsection
46109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46111 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46116 \begin_inset Index idx
46119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46126 \begin_inset Index idx
46129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46130 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46138 \begin_layout Standard
46139 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46140 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46141 provides keyboard maps.
46142 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46143 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46146 \begin_inset space ~
46150 \begin_inset space ~
46155 and select the keyboard map file named
46162 \begin_layout Standard
46171 keyboard map and, if you use the
46175 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46178 arg "keymap-primary"
46184 arg "keymap-secondary"
46187 respectively or toggle between them with
46190 arg "keymap-toggle"
46196 \begin_layout Standard
46197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46214 \begin_layout Standard
46215 You can also specify the mouse
46217 Wheel scrolling speed
46220 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46224 Middle mouse button pasting
46226 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46227 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46230 \begin_layout Standard
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46247 you can select a key for zooming.
46248 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46251 \begin_layout Subsection
46255 \begin_layout Standard
46256 Input completion is described in section
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46263 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46270 \begin_layout Section
46272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46279 \begin_inset Index idx
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46289 \begin_inset Index idx
46292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46303 are normally determined during
46305 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46308 \begin_layout Description
46310 \begin_inset space ~
46313 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46314 's working directory.
46315 It is the default when you
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46334 \begin_layout Description
46336 \begin_inset space ~
46339 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46341 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46343 \begin_inset space ~
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46355 \begin_layout Description
46357 \begin_inset space ~
46360 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46366 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46370 \begin_inset Newline newline
46374 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46386 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46387 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46395 \begin_layout Description
46397 \begin_inset space ~
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46411 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46412 \begin_inset space ~
46416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46418 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46426 will be used to save the backups.
46427 \begin_inset Newline newline
46430 Backup files have the ending
46431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46441 \begin_layout Description
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46446 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46447 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46449 \begin_inset Newline newline
46456 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46462 You can edit this file with the program
46471 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46472 in its preferences under
46475 \begin_inset space ~
46481 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46486 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46488 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46489 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46495 and \SpecialChar LyX
46496 need to be running the same time.
46497 \begin_inset Newline newline
46500 The pipe is also used for the
46504 feature, see section
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46511 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46516 \begin_inset Newline newline
46519 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46520 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46521 \begin_inset Newline newline
46537 \begin_layout Description
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46542 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46545 \begin_layout Description
46547 \begin_inset space ~
46550 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46551 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46552 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46555 \begin_layout Description
46557 \begin_inset space ~
46560 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46566 You only need to specify it if you are using
46570 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46572 For \SpecialChar LyX
46577 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46581 \begin_layout Description
46583 \begin_inset space ~
46586 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46587 When \SpecialChar LyX
46588 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46589 to find it on the system.
46590 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46592 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46601 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46602 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46605 \begin_layout Description
46607 \begin_inset space ~
46610 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46611 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46612 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46613 code or in the document
46615 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46617 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46618 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46619 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46620 scanned for the input files.
46621 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46622 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46624 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46625 compilation may fail for some documents.
46628 \begin_layout Section
46632 \begin_layout Standard
46633 Here you can insert your
46642 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46644 \begin_inset space ~
46648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46650 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46654 , to mark changes you make as yours.
46657 \begin_layout Section
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 Language ! Settings
46669 \begin_inset Index idx
46672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46673 Settings ! Language
46681 \begin_layout Subsection
46683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46685 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46692 \begin_layout Description
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46698 \begin_inset space ~
46701 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
46703 You can find its actual translation status here:
46704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46706 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
46714 \begin_layout Description
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46719 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
46720 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
46721 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
46722 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
46723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46739 The most widespread language package is
46744 \begin_inset Index idx
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46754 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
46756 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46757 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46758 come with the alternative
46764 \begin_inset Index idx
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 packages ! polyglossia
46774 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
46775 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
46781 The available selections are described in section
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46788 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46795 \begin_layout Description
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46800 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46801 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
46802 you can here specify the command to start the package.
46803 An example is the start command
46809 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
46811 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46831 selectlanguage{$$lang}
46836 \begin_layout Description
46838 \begin_inset space ~
46846 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
46847 command toggles the package on and off.
46850 \begin_layout Description
46852 \begin_inset space ~
46856 \begin_inset space ~
46859 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
46863 \begin_layout Description
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46872 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
46876 \begin_layout Description
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46885 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
46886 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
46887 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
46889 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
46896 \begin_layout Description
46898 \begin_inset space ~
46901 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
46903 When this option is not set, the
46906 \begin_inset space ~
46911 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46913 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
46916 \begin_inset space ~
46924 \begin_layout Description
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46932 \begin_inset space ~
46938 When it is not set, the
46941 \begin_inset space ~
46946 is set to the end of the document.
46949 \begin_layout Description
46951 \begin_inset space ~
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46958 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
46959 language will be underlined in blue.
46962 \begin_layout Description
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46968 \begin_inset space ~
46971 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
46972 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
46975 \begin_layout Description
46977 \begin_inset space ~
46980 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
46981 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
46982 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
46983 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
46986 \begin_layout Subsection
46990 \begin_layout Standard
46991 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46998 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47005 \begin_layout Section
47009 \begin_layout Subsection
47011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47013 name "subsec:General-output"
47020 \begin_layout Description
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47025 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47027 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47029 \begin_inset space ~
47035 For a detailed description see section
47037 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47042 \begin_inset space ~
47050 \begin_layout Description
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47055 Options Options for the program
47059 that is used for the export format
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47070 reference "subsec:Export"
47075 Possible options are listed in the
47080 \begin_inset Newline newline
47084 \begin_inset Flex URL
47087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47089 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47099 \begin_layout Description
47101 \begin_inset space ~
47105 \begin_inset space ~
47108 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47111 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47112 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47120 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47123 \begin_layout Description
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47129 \begin_inset Index idx
47132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47139 \begin_inset Index idx
47142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47143 Settings ! Date format
47148 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47149 \begin_inset Newline newline
47153 \begin_inset Flex URL
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47158 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47164 \begin_inset Newline newline
47167 For example the format
47168 \begin_inset Newline newline
47172 \begin_inset Newline newline
47175 prints the date as day/month/year.
47178 \begin_layout Description
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47187 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47188 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47191 \begin_layout Subsection
47197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47199 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47204 \begin_inset Index idx
47207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47208 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47217 \begin_layout Description
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47227 \begin_inset space ~
47231 \begin_inset space ~
47234 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47239 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47260 are used for Cyrillic.
47261 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47274 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47276 sets up in the background.
47277 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47280 \begin_layout Description
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47286 \begin_inset space ~
47290 \begin_inset space ~
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47297 options They only have an effect when the program
47301 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47304 \begin_layout Standard
47305 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47306 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47307 manuals of the applications.
47310 \begin_layout Description
47312 \begin_inset space ~
47315 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47316 \begin_inset space ~
47320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47322 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47329 \begin_layout Description
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47334 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47335 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47341 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47348 \begin_layout Description
47350 \begin_inset space ~
47353 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47354 \begin_inset space ~
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47360 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47367 \begin_layout Description
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47376 command Command for the program
47378 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47381 that is described in the section
47383 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47388 Additional Features
47393 \begin_layout Standard
47394 There are additionally the following options:
47397 \begin_layout Description
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47403 \begin_inset space ~
47407 \begin_inset space ~
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \begin_inset space ~
47419 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47437 to separate folders.
47438 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47440 \begin_inset Index idx
47443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47450 \begin_inset Index idx
47453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47462 \begin_layout Description
47464 \begin_inset space ~
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47472 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 changes Removes all manually set
47493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47494 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47501 dialog when changing the document class.
47504 \begin_layout Section
47506 \begin_inset space ~
47510 \begin_inset Index idx
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47522 \begin_layout Subsection
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47526 name "subsec:Converters"
47531 \begin_inset Index idx
47534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47543 \begin_layout Standard
47544 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47545 from one format to another.
47546 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47547 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47554 \begin_inset space ~
47559 field and press the
47564 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47568 \begin_inset space ~
47573 drop-down list, modify the
47577 field and press the
47584 \begin_layout Standard
47587 Converter File Cache
47593 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47595 Maximum Age (in days
47598 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47599 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47602 \begin_layout Standard
47603 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47604 definition, is described in the section
47615 \begin_layout Subsection
47617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47619 name "sec:File-Formats"
47624 \begin_inset Index idx
47627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47634 \begin_inset Index idx
47637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 \begin_layout Standard
47647 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
47657 programs that should be used for certain formats.
47660 \begin_layout Standard
47661 You can also define the
47663 Default output format
47665 that is used when you use
47667 View, Update, View Master Document
47671 Update Master Document
47677 menu or the toolbar.
47680 \begin_layout Standard
47681 More about formats and their options is described in the section
47692 \begin_layout Standard
47693 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
47695 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
47696 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
47697 This is done by specifying a
47702 More about this is described in the section
47713 \begin_layout Chapter
47714 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47716 \begin_inset Index idx
47719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47728 name "chap:Units-available-in"
47735 \begin_layout Standard
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47743 reference "tab:Units"
47747 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47748 and used in this documentation.
47751 \begin_layout Standard
47752 \begin_inset Float table
47758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47759 \begin_inset Caption Standard
47761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47777 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47785 \begin_inset Tabular
47786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
47787 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
47788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47789 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47996 scaled point (65536
47997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48075 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48148 % of original image width
48153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48464 \begin_layout Chapter
48466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48468 name "chap:Credits"
48475 \begin_layout Standard
48476 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48477 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48480 \begin_layout Itemize
48483 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48486 \begin_layout Itemize
48492 \begin_layout Itemize
48498 \begin_layout Itemize
48504 \begin_layout Itemize
48510 \begin_layout Itemize
48516 \begin_layout Itemize
48522 \begin_layout Itemize
48528 \begin_layout Itemize
48531 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48534 \begin_layout Itemize
48540 \begin_layout Itemize
48546 \begin_layout Itemize
48552 \begin_layout Itemize
48558 \begin_layout Itemize
48564 \begin_layout Itemize
48570 \begin_layout Itemize
48576 \begin_layout Itemize
48582 \begin_layout Itemize
48583 The \SpecialChar LyX
48585 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48595 \begin_layout Standard
48596 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48599 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48606 \begin_layout Bibliography
48607 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48608 LatexCommand bibitem
48615 The \SpecialChar LyX
48617 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48620 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48626 \begin_inset Newline newline
48630 \begin_inset Flex URL
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48635 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48643 \begin_layout Bibliography
48644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48645 LatexCommand bibitem
48646 key "latexcompanion"
48651 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48653 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48654 Companion Second Edition.
48657 Addison-Wesley, 2004
48660 \begin_layout Bibliography
48661 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48662 LatexCommand bibitem
48668 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48671 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48675 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48678 \begin_layout Bibliography
48679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48680 LatexCommand bibitem
48689 : A Document Preparation System.
48692 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48695 \begin_layout Bibliography
48696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48697 LatexCommand bibitem
48707 The \SpecialChar TeX
48711 Addison-Wesley, 1984
48714 \begin_layout Bibliography
48715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48716 LatexCommand bibitem
48722 The \SpecialChar TeX
48724 \begin_inset Newline newline
48728 \begin_inset Flex URL
48731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
48741 \begin_layout Bibliography
48742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48743 LatexCommand bibitem
48749 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48751 \begin_inset Newline newline
48755 \begin_inset Flex URL
48758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48760 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
48768 \begin_layout Bibliography
48769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48770 LatexCommand bibitem
48777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48779 name "Documentation"
48780 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
48787 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48791 \begin_inset Newline newline
48795 \begin_inset Flex URL
48798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48800 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
48808 \begin_layout Bibliography
48809 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48810 LatexCommand bibitem
48817 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48819 name "Documentation"
48820 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
48825 how to use the program
48827 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48831 \begin_inset Newline newline
48835 \begin_inset Flex URL
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48840 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
48848 \begin_layout Bibliography
48849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48850 LatexCommand bibitem
48857 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48859 name "Documentation"
48860 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
48865 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48871 \begin_inset Index idx
48874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48876 packages ! biblatex
48882 \begin_inset Newline newline
48886 \begin_inset Flex URL
48889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48891 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
48899 \begin_layout Bibliography
48900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48901 LatexCommand bibitem
48908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48910 name "Documentation"
48911 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
48916 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48922 \begin_inset Index idx
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 \begin_inset Newline newline
48937 \begin_inset Flex URL
48940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48942 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
48950 \begin_layout Bibliography
48951 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48952 LatexCommand bibitem
48959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48961 name "Documentation"
48962 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
48972 \begin_inset Newline newline
48976 \begin_inset Flex URL
48979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
48989 \begin_layout Bibliography
48990 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48991 LatexCommand bibitem
48992 key "makeindex-man"
48998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49001 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49011 \begin_inset Newline newline
49015 \begin_inset Flex URL
49018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49020 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49028 \begin_layout Bibliography
49029 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49030 LatexCommand bibitem
49037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49039 name "Documentation"
49040 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49050 \begin_inset Newline newline
49054 \begin_inset Flex URL
49057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49059 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49067 \begin_layout Bibliography
49068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49069 LatexCommand bibitem
49076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49078 name "Documentation"
49079 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49084 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49086 \begin_inset Newline newline
49090 \begin_inset Flex URL
49093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49103 \begin_layout Bibliography
49104 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49105 LatexCommand bibitem
49112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49114 name "Documentation"
49115 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49120 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49126 \begin_inset Index idx
49129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49137 \begin_inset Newline newline
49141 \begin_inset Flex URL
49144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49154 \begin_layout Bibliography
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49156 LatexCommand bibitem
49163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49165 name "Documentation"
49166 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49171 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49177 \begin_inset Index idx
49180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49182 packages ! enumitem
49188 \begin_inset Newline newline
49192 \begin_inset Flex URL
49195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49197 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49205 \begin_layout Bibliography
49206 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49207 LatexCommand bibitem
49214 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49216 name "Documentation"
49217 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49222 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49228 \begin_inset Index idx
49231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49233 packages ! fancyhdr
49239 \begin_inset Newline newline
49243 \begin_inset Flex URL
49246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49248 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49256 \begin_layout Bibliography
49257 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49258 LatexCommand bibitem
49265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49267 name "Documentation"
49268 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49273 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49279 \begin_inset Index idx
49282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49284 packages ! hyperref
49290 \begin_inset Newline newline
49294 \begin_inset Flex URL
49297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49299 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49307 \begin_layout Bibliography
49308 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49309 LatexCommand bibitem
49316 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49318 name "Documentation"
49319 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49324 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49330 \begin_inset Index idx
49333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49341 \begin_inset Newline newline
49345 \begin_inset Flex URL
49348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49350 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49358 \begin_layout Bibliography
49359 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49360 LatexCommand bibitem
49367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49369 name "Documentation"
49370 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49375 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49381 \begin_inset Index idx
49384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49386 packages ! prettyref
49392 \begin_inset Newline newline
49396 \begin_inset Flex URL
49399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49401 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49409 \begin_layout Bibliography
49410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49411 LatexCommand bibitem
49418 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49420 name "Documentation"
49421 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49426 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49432 \begin_inset Index idx
49435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49437 packages ! refstyle
49443 \begin_inset Newline newline
49447 \begin_inset Flex URL
49450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49452 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49460 \begin_layout Bibliography
49461 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49462 LatexCommand bibitem
49469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49472 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49477 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49479 \begin_inset Newline newline
49483 \begin_inset Flex URL
49486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49488 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49496 \begin_layout Bibliography
49497 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49498 LatexCommand bibitem
49505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49508 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49513 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49515 \begin_inset Newline newline
49519 \begin_inset Flex URL
49522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49524 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49532 \begin_layout Bibliography
49533 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49534 LatexCommand bibitem
49541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49544 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49549 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49550 for Cyrillic languages:
49551 \begin_inset Newline newline
49555 \begin_inset Flex URL
49558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49560 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49568 \begin_layout Bibliography
49569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49570 LatexCommand bibitem
49577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49580 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49585 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49587 \begin_inset Newline newline
49591 \begin_inset Flex URL
49594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49596 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49604 \begin_layout Bibliography
49605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49606 LatexCommand bibitem
49613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49616 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49621 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49623 \begin_inset Newline newline
49627 \begin_inset Flex URL
49630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49632 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49640 \begin_layout Bibliography
49641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49642 LatexCommand bibitem
49649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49652 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49657 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49659 \begin_inset Newline newline
49663 \begin_inset Flex URL
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49668 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49676 \begin_layout Bibliography
49677 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49678 LatexCommand bibitem
49685 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49688 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49693 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49695 \begin_inset Newline newline
49699 \begin_inset Flex URL
49702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49704 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
49712 \begin_layout Bibliography
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49714 LatexCommand bibitem
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49724 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
49729 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49731 \begin_inset Newline newline
49735 \begin_inset Flex URL
49738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49740 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
49748 \begin_layout Bibliography
49749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49750 LatexCommand bibitem
49757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49760 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
49765 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49767 \begin_inset Newline newline
49771 \begin_inset Flex URL
49774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49776 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
49784 \begin_layout Bibliography
49785 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49786 LatexCommand bibitem
49793 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49796 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
49801 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49803 \begin_inset Newline newline
49807 \begin_inset Flex URL
49810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49812 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
49820 \begin_layout Bibliography
49821 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49822 LatexCommand bibitem
49829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49832 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
49837 about new features in
49843 \begin_inset Newline newline
49847 \begin_inset Flex URL
49850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49852 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
49860 \begin_layout Standard
49861 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49895 \begin_inset Note Note
49898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49905 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
49906 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
49907 bibliography is the second one:
49915 \begin_layout Standard
49916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
49917 LatexCommand bibtex
49918 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
49919 options "biblio/alphadin"
49926 \begin_layout Standard
49927 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49931 \begin_layout Standard
49932 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
49933 LatexCommand printnomenclature
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
49940 LatexCommand printindex